XD Series X-ray Microscope

Users Guide

Version 21.3

December 2014
Dage

Important Information
for
Our Customers
Nordson DAGE Support Options

Dear Customer,
Congratulations on your purchase of your Nordson DAGE X-ray inspection system.
Nordson DAGE is committed to excellent service World-wide and our goal is to provide you with
professional assistance in the use of our Test & Measurement Equipment, wherever you are
located.
Nordson DAGE offices are located in six strategic centers in the USA, Asia & Europe and the
company’s customer service & support is acknowledged to be ‘the best in the business’.
We trust that you find our product an invaluable tool & hope that you will pass on any comments
you may have so that we can continue to enhance the product and service to you.
Our Web address is: www.nordsondage.com.
Forward
Foreword
The product described in this guide is subject to continuous development and improvement.
Consequently, there may be minor variations in specifications, facilities or operation that are not
covered in this guide.
The machine must be operated and maintained only by suitably trained and qualified personnel.
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information provided in this guide is accurate at
the time of going to print. If any errors or omissions are noticed, please notify Dage Precision
Industries Ltd.
Copyright
© 2014 Dage Precision Industries Ltd. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form by any means without the prior written permission of
Dage Precision Industries Ltd.
Trademarks
All trademarks are acknowledged as belonging to their respective companies.
Manufactured by
Dage Precision Industries Limited,
25 Faraday Road,
Rabans Lane Industrial Area,
Aylesbury,
Buckinghamshire,
HP19 8RY
United Kingdom.
Regional offices
Sales Customer Service
[email protected]
UK [email protected]
+44 1296 317800
[email protected]
Germany [email protected]
+49 7021 950690
[email protected]
Singapore [email protected]
+65 6552 7533
[email protected]
Japan Contact Sales
+81 432 995851
[email protected]
China [email protected]
+86 512 6665 2008
[email protected]
USA [email protected]
+1 510 683 3930
 5

1. Dage Precision Industries Limited Software License - EULA

1. You, the end user, are granted a non-exclusive and non-transferable license to
use the software accompanying Dage Precision Industries Limited products only
in connection with those products. No license is granted for any other purpose.
There is no right granted to copy, redistribute, reverse engineer, or modify of the
software.
2. The software, including any source code, documentation, appearance, structure
and organization, are proprietary products of Dage Precision Industries Limited
and are protected by copyright and other laws.
3. This license is not a sale. Title and copyrights to the software, including source
code, documentation, appearance, structure, organization and any copies made
by you remain with Dage Precision Industries Limited.
4. This Agreement is effective until terminated. Failure to comply with the terms
and conditions of this Agreement will result in the automatic termination of this
Agreement and will make available to Dage Precision Industries Limited any
and all legal remedies. Upon termination of this license you must immediately
destroy the software programs and all back-up copies thereof.
6 User Guide V21.3 Software
 7

2. About this manual

The English version of this document is considered to be the Original Instructions for
this machine.
For Installation and Maintenance instructions please refer to the correct Installation and
Maintenance Guide.
Document version: Version 4 - December 2014.
This User Guide is essential reading for understanding how to use this machine safely
and correctly.
8 User Guide V21.3 Software
 i

Contents
1. Dage Precision Industries Limited Software License - EULA 5

2. About this manual 7

3. Safety information 11
3.1. Symbols 11
3.2. Labels 12
3.2.1. Safety Lockouts 14
3.3. Moving the machine 14
3.4. X-ray safety 15
3.4.1. Ionizing radiation 15
3.4.2. Shielding methods 15
3.4.3. Measurement methods 15
3.5. Statutory regulations 16
3.5.1. Appointed safety personnel 16
3.5.2. Local safety rules 16
3.6. X-ray interlocks and safety warnings 16
3.6.1. Interlocking methods 16
3.7. Hazardous materials 17
3.7.1. Lead 17
3.7.2. Beryllium 17
3.7.3. Locking off the power 17
3.8. High voltage hazard 18

4. Environmental information - X-ray machines 19

4.1. Environmental impact statement- X-ray machines only 19
4.2. Safe disposal instructions- X-ray machines only 19

5. Machine overview 21
5.1. Hardware 22
5.1.1. Controls and Indicators 22
5.1.1.1. Main isolator 23
5.1.1.2. Key-switch and Power On button 23
5.1.1.3. Emergency stop button 24
5.1.1.4. Monitor 24
5.1.1.5. Keyboard and mouse 24
5.1.1.6. Printer 25
5.1.1.7. Sample access door 25
5.1.1.8. X-ray warnings 25
5.1.2. Setting up the work station 25
5.1.2.1. Setting the console and monitor height 25
5.1.2.2. Positioning the keyboard and mouse 26
5.1.2.3. Setting the chair 26
5.2. Software interface 26
5.2.1. Main tabs 27
5.2.2. Panel Activation 29
5.2.3. Right Hand Panel 31
ii User Guide V21.3 Software

5.2.4. Low Resolution Monitor Option 32

5.2.5. Second Monitor Option 33
5.2.6. More options menu 34
5.2.6.1. More Options List 36

6. Getting started 37
6.1. Turning on 37
6.1.1. X-ray tube vacuum 41
6.1.2. Warm-up 42
6.2. Turning off 42
6.3. Switching off in an emergency 44
6.4. Loading/unloading a sample 44
6.4.1. Maximizing magnification 45
6.5. Sample holders 46
6.5.1. Removing or refitting a sample holder 46
6.5.2. Over-height samples 47
6.5.3. Customizing for low density samples 47

7. Inspecting a sample 49
7.1. Getting ready 49
7.2. Switching on the X-rays 50
7.2.1. Getting a picture 51
7.3. Making a navigation map 52
7.3.1. Scan Board 53
7.3.2. Scan Full 53
7.3.3. Live Mapping 54
7.3.4. High res. map 55
7.4. Selecting what to see 55
7.4.1. Using the map 55
7.4.2. Adjusting the brightness of the image 56
7.4.3. Moving the picture around 56
7.4.3.1. Mouse Drag 57
7.4.3.2. Mouse Joystick 57
7.4.3.3. Hardware joystick option 58
7.4.4. Changing the magnification 58
7.4.5. Viewing at an angle 58
7.4.6. Iso-centric oblique angle viewing or 'Setting the Height' 60
7.4.7. Setting an orbit 61

8. Adjusting for the best image 63

8.1. Using the imaging wizard 63
8.1.1. Quick guide 63
8.1.2. How it works 64
8.2. Choosing a pre-configured setting 65
8.2.1. Choosing from the list 65
8.2.2. Choosing from the buttons 66
8.3. Setting the tube manually 66
8.3.1. Image quality settings 67
8.3.2. Gray scale equalization 68
8.3.2.1. Automatically setting the equalization images 68
 Contents iii

8.3.2.2. Setting the dark equalization image manually 68

8.3.2.3. Setting the bright equalization image manually 70
8.3.2.4. Applying image equalization 72
8.3.2.5. Bright/Dark Image Equalization and Noise Pattern Correlation 73
8.4. Automatic image processing 74
8.5. Adding additional image enhancements 75
8.5.1. Noise reduction 75
8.5.1.1. The effects of noise 75
8.5.1.2. Image averaging 75
8.5.2. Camera Gain Adjustment 76
8.5.3. Adjusting the contrast 76
8.5.3.1. Brightness and Contrast adjustment 77
8.5.3.2. Histogram Adjustment 78
8.5.3.3. Live Contrast Stretching 79
8.5.3.4. Stretch Contrast minitab 79
8.5.4. Inverting the image 81
8.5.5. Coloring the image 81
8.5.6. Creating 3-D images 82
8.5.7. Quad Screen 83
8.5.8. Adding image filtering and enhancements 85
8.5.8.1. Introduction 85
8.5.8.2. Understanding Filters 86
8.5.8.3. Creating a filter pipeline 88
8.5.8.4. Setting filter availability 90
8.5.8.5. Selecting filters for use 91
8.6. Image recipes 92
8.6.1. General viewing recipe 93
8.6.2. Selecting an image recipe 93
8.6.3. Saving a recipe 93
8.6.4. Assigning a recipe to a button 94
8.6.5. Updating a recipe 94
8.6.6. Deleting a recipe 95
8.7. Live Image Processing 95
8.7.1. Live Image Filters 95
8.7.2. Stretch Contrast Filters 96
8.7.3. Live Image Smoothing 97

9. Adding notes and saving images 99

9.1. Marking the image 99
9.1.1. Configuring fonts 101
9.1.2. Annotations 101
9.2. Printing the image 108
9.3. Saving the image 108
9.4. Marking failures on the navigation map 109
9.4.1. Adding a marker 110
9.4.2. Clearing markers 110
9.4.3. Saving the navigation map with markers 110
9.4.4. Printing the navigation map with markers 111
9.4.5. Exporting defect locations in CSV format 112
9.4.6. Save the current map 113
9.4.7. Loading a previously saved map 114
iv User Guide V21.3 Software

10. Measuring ball grid arrays (BGA) manually 115

10.1. Getting ready 115
10.1.1. Locating the part 115
10.1.2. Recipe settings 115
10.1.3. Setting the picture 116
10.1.4. Setting the height 116
10.2. Measuring the ball outlines 117
10.2.1. Finding the ball outline 118
10.2.2. Measuring the ball diameter 121
10.2.3. Measuring the ball roundness 121
10.2.4. Measuring the ball area 122
10.2.5. Multiple measurements 123
10.3. Measuring the ball voiding 124
10.3.1. Threshold detection 124
10.3.1.1. Standard automatic method 124
10.3.1.2. Manual method 127
10.3.1.3. Adaptive method 127
10.3.2. Blob Detector 128
10.3.2.1. Measuring voids by means of blob detection 128
10.3.2.2. Thin Solder option 130
10.3.2.3. Thick Solder option 133
10.3.3. Exporting Data 137
10.3.3.1. What is Exported 138
10.3.3.2. Exporting the data 139
10.3.3.3. Save Button 139
10.3.3.4. Number the features Checkbox 140
10.3.3.5. Test Sample ID Editbox 140
10.3.3.6. Sample CSV Data File 141
10.3.3.7. XLSX Results 142

11. Measuring die and general voids manually 145

11.1. About region drawing tools 145
11.1.1. Odd shaped regions 146
11.1.1.1. Merging two shapes 147
11.1.1.2. Deleting part of a shape 148
11.1.1.3. Trimming a shape 148
11.2. Measuring voids 149
11.3. Adding and removing void areas manually 150
11.4. Display options 152
11.4.1. View Indicators 152
11.4.2. Pass / fail limits 152
11.5. Advanced tools 154
11.5.1. Adaptive method 154
11.5.2. Auto option 155
11.5.3. Manual method 157
11.5.4. Blob Detection method 158

12. Automatic BGA and void measurements 159

12.1. Creating a BGA routine 159
12.1.1. Starting the BGA Wizard 160
 Contents v

12.1.2. Choosing the automation type 160

12.1.3. Selecting threshold and ball size 161
12.1.4. Removing unwanted objects 161
12.1.5. Setting the correct pitch 162
12.1.6. Selecting what to include 164
12.1.7. Identifying ball A1 and B1 165
12.1.8. Choosing the measurement settings 166
12.1.9. Setting void parameters 167
12.1.10. Saving the routine 167
12.2. Creating an automated void measurement routine 168
12.2.1. Starting the Void Wizard 168
12.2.2. Choosing the automation type - void measurement 168
12.2.3. Defining the area outline 168
12.2.4. Setting the void parameters and limits 169
12.2.5. Saving the routine 170
12.3. Inspecting wire sweep automatically 171
12.4. Inspecting a Quad-flatpacked No Lead (QFN) device 175
12.4.1. Creating a QFN routine 175
12.5. Inspecting Devices using Pad Analysis 183
12.5.1. Creating a Pad Analysis Routine 183
12.6. Loading an existing automation routine 187
12.6.1. Selecting the routine 187
12.6.2. Routine loaded 188
12.7. Executing a routine 188
12.7.1. BGA execution 189
12.7.2. Failed execution 189
12.7.3. Successful execution 191
12.7.4. Results 191
12.8. Changing measurement limits 198
12.9. Template Based Analysis 198
12.9.1. Using the CAD editor 199
12.9.1.1. Layer Types 199
12.9.1.2. Project Tools 200
12.9.1.3. Editor Modes 200
12.9.1.4. Layer Tools 201
12.9.1.5. Template Edit Tools 202
12.9.1.6. Template Library Access 209
12.9.2. Creating a CAD template 211
12.9.3. Importing an existing CAD template 216
12.9.4. Creating a Template Based Analysis 217
12.9.5. Selecting and Running the Template Based Analysis 220
12.10. Deleting saved Auto routines 223

13. X-Plane® Introduction 225

13.1. X-Plane® Acquisition Screen 225
13.1.1. X-Plane® Screen 226
13.1.1.1. X-Plane® Parameters 226
13.1.1.2. Reconstruction 227
13.1.2. Fiducial 229
13.1.2.1. Remote Fiducial set-up 230
vi User Guide V21.3 Software

13.2. X-Plane® Viewer 231

13.2.1. Short Cut Keys 232
13.2.2. Histogram and Brightness/Contrast controls 233
13.2.3. Live Contrast Stretching 233
13.2.4. Image Enhancement Filters 235
13.2.5. Model Import, Saving images and Exporting projections 235
13.2.6. Video 235
13.2.7. Outline and Void Analysis 236
13.3. X-Plane® Operation 237

14. Measurement Features 243

14.1. Positioning controls 243
14.1.1. Jog control 243
14.2. Oblique angle and Feature Height 245
14.3. Current Location 246
14.3.1. Absolute Position readout 246
14.3.2. Relative Position readout 246
14.4. Measuring point-to-point (distance) 248
14.5. Making distance and angle measurements 249
14.6. Distance Only (mm) measurements 250
14.7. Measuring wire sweep 251
14.8. Perpendicular Measurement 253
14.9. 2x Perpendicular Measurement 255
14.10. Pixel graph 258
14.11. Alternate measurement access 259

15. Through-hole percentage fill analysis 261

16. Making automatic inspections 265

16.1. Inspecting die, BGA and general voids automatically 267
16.1.1. Part location and alignment 267
16.1.1.1. Product alignment points 267
16.1.1.2. Manual Product Alignment 269
16.1.1.3. Automatic fiducial alignment 270
16.2. Overview of features 271
16.2.1. Practical suggestions 271
16.2.2. Top level Automatic Inspection Routine Controls 272
16.2.2.1. Save or copy current routine 272
16.2.2.2. Open a program 273
16.2.2.3. Choose program(s) to delete 274
16.2.2.4. Automated Inspection Routine Wizard 276
16.2.2.5. Cross-hairs 276
16.2.2.6. Navigation map 276
16.2.2.7. Import CAD file 276
16.2.2.8. Run Automatic Inspection Routine 276
16.2.2.9. View past inspection results 277
16.2.2.10. Create / Edit inspection steps within an automated routine 277
16.2.2.11. Configuring the way patterns are run and reported 278
16.2.3. Operator reference image and prompts 279
16.2.4. Operator grading and viewing options 280
 Contents vii

16.3. Recording or editing an Automated Inspection Routine 281

16.3.1. Creating a new routine using the Automatic Inspection Routine (AIR) wizard 281
16.3.1.1. Select auto-advance option 284
16.3.1.2. Define number of boards and patterns 285
16.3.1.3. Define board outline 286
16.3.1.4. Define board layout method 287
16.3.1.5. Manual board layout 288
16.3.1.6. Matrix board layout 289
16.3.1.7. Choose the alignment method 291
16.3.1.8. Manual alignment 291
16.3.1.9. Fiducial alignment 292
16.3.1.10. Define pattern outline 292
16.3.1.11. Select pattern layout method 293
16.3.1.12. Manual pattern layout 295
16.3.1.13. Matrix pattern layout 296
16.3.2. Defining inspection steps within an automated routine 297
16.3.3. Editing inspection steps within an automated routine 298
16.3.3.1. Main editor controls 299
16.3.3.2. Adding a manual inspection step 308
16.3.3.3. Adding a fiducial alignment step to a pattern 309
16.3.3.4. Adding an automatic inspection routine step 309
16.3.3.5. Adding a cursor inspection step 310
16.3.3.6. Adding an orbiting inspection step 310
16.3.3.7. Grading options - logging passes and failures during automated
inspection 311
16.3.3.8. Editing Failure Codes 314
16.3.3.9. Automatic advance 315
16.3.4. Changing an existing inspection step 317
16.3.5. Deleting an inspection step 318
16.3.6. Inserting an inspection step 318
16.4. Running an inspection routine 318
16.5. Data storage 319
16.6. Viewing the on-line summary report 323
16.7. Viewing an automated inspection routine report off-line 325
16.7.1. Exporting the report 328
16.8. Using automatic inspections 330
16.8.1. Making automated inspections 330
16.8.1.1. Selecting an inspection routine 330
16.8.1.2. Board, pattern or inspection step exclusion 331
16.8.1.3. Starting the inspection 332
16.8.1.4. Moving through the inspection sequence 337
16.8.1.5. Correcting for sample misalignment 337
16.8.1.6. Moving through the inspection sequence 340
16.8.1.7. Automatic movement between inspection steps 340
16.8.1.8. Recording and grading results 340
16.8.1.9. Automated Routine analysis 341
16.8.2. Viewing the on-line inspection report 341
16.8.3. Second Monitor Results Screen 342
16.8.4. Importing and Using CAD Data 343
16.8.4.1. CAD Import Wizard 344
viii User Guide V21.3 Software

17. Capturing video images 347

17.1. Using video capture 347
17.2. Setting the video capture options 349
17.3. Video Codecs 352

18. Database viewer 355

18.1. Database Connection 356
18.2. Refreshing Database Data 359
18.3. Automatic Routines 359
18.4. Results 360
18.5. Automatic Measurements 360
18.6. Read Only Database access 361

19. User maintenance 363

19.1. Tube optimization 363
19.1.1. Optimizing the tube 363
19.1.1.1. Built-in methods 363
19.1.1.2. Starting optimization 364
19.1.1.3. Custom methods 365
19.1.1.4. Image Defect Correction 367

20. System configuration 368

20.1. Settings on the options screen 368
20.1.1. Clearance Height 368
20.1.2. Live Image Smoothing 368
20.1.3. Compatible printing 368
20.1.4. Image optimization 369
20.1.5. Show controls 369
20.1.6. Low Dose Mode 371
20.1.7. CT Systems Options (if option fitted) 371
20.1.8. Distortion Correction 371
20.1.9. Defect Correction 372
20.1.10. Login 372
20.1.11. Equalization 372
20.1.12. Camera Gain Settings 372
20.1.13. Accessibility options 372
20.2. Operator and supervisor access 373
20.3. User names 374
20.3.1. Creating a new user 374
20.3.2. Editing an existing user’s full name 375
20.3.3. Changing the current user 376
20.3.4. Deleting an existing user 376
 Contents ix

20.4. Forced Login 377

20.5. Setting the operating language 379
20.6. Importing a new language file 379
20.7. Language hierarchy 380
20.8. Format of language files 381
20.9. Creating custom definitions of terms 382
20.10. Creating a new language 385
20.11. Updating a language file 386
20.12. Licensed Functionality 388

21. Principles of operation 391

21.1. X-ray generation 391
21.1.1. The electromagnetic spectrum 391
21.1.2. Simple x-ray generator 392
21.1.3. Thermionic emission 392
21.1.4. Controlling current flow 393
21.1.5. X-rays from the tungsten target 394
21.2. Imaging with x-rays 397
21.2.1. The Importance of Spot Size 397
21.3. Radiation measurements and units 398
21.3.1. SI units 398
21.3.2. Old units 398

22. Index 399

x User Guide V21.3 Software
 11

3. Safety information
3.1. Symbols
All safety-related notes, reminders, etc., are marked by an appropriate symbol and
the text highlighted in red. Please read them carefully.

Symbol Meaning

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which,

if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may
also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
12 User Guide V21.3 Software

3.2. Labels
Two different safety labeling systems are available for indicating potential hazards.
Either system may be used, with the labels appropriate to the hazard being attached
to the machine. It is important to take note of these safety labels and to follow the
specified safety procedures.

Label Meaning

For the purposes of this unit indicates that X-rays are emitted when
the X-ray tube is energized. X-rays are harmful to the human body.
To comply with local and national regulations additional text may be
required to accompany the radiation trefoil. Due to variations in local
requirements this will need to be supplied locally.

Indicates the presence of high voltages within the equipment. High

voltages can cause death or serious injury.

Indicates the presence of poisonous material within the machine.

 User Guide V21.3 Software 13

Label Meaning

For the purposes of this unit

IONISING RADIATION Indicates that X-rays are emitted
Exposure to ionising radiation when
energised may cause death or serious injury.
when the X-ray tube is energized.
Do not operate outside Dage enclosure X-rays are harmful to the human
body.
Indicates the presence of
poisonous material within the
machine.

Indicates that the item weighs

25kg. Mishandling during lifting
HEAVY OBJECT (25Kg) could result in injury or crushing.
Risk of injury or crushing.
Observe all lifting precautions.

Indicates the presence of high

voltages within the equipment. High
voltages can cause death or
serious injury.

Indicates the presence of high

voltages within the equipment. High
voltages can cause death or
serious injury.

Indicates the presence of high

voltages within the equipment after
Emergency shut down. High
voltages can cause death or
serious injury.

Indicates the presence of residual

high voltage after power off and
electrical lockout. High voltages
can cause death or serious injury.
14 User Guide V21.3 Software

Label Meaning

Indicates that the object weighs

approximately 250kg. Ensure the
support leg is securely fitted before
moving.

Indicates that the surface of the

tube may become very hot during
Hot Surface
extended use at high voltages, and
Do not touch
after tube maintenance.
To avoid possible skin burns,
disconnect and lockout
power and allow surface
to cool before surfacing.

Indicates that the item weighs in

excess of 25kg. Mishandling during
lifting could result in injury or
crushing.

3.2.1. Safety Lockouts

The following labels indicate where system lockouts can be installed during
maintenance.
Label Meaning
Indicates the location for a lockout when isolating the
machine from the pneumatic supply.

Indicates the location for a lockout when isolating the

machine from the electrical supply.

3.3. Moving the machine

The machine is extremely heavy due to its rigid construction and lead lining.
Attempting to move the machine could result in serious damage to the machine, or
injury to individuals. The machine should be moved in accordance with the
instructions contained in the Installation and Maintenance Guide.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 15

3.4. X-ray safety

3.4.1. Ionizing radiation
The machine produces X-rays that are harmful to living tissue.
 The X-ray source is completely contained in the shielded cabinet, with
interlocked access doors preventing accidental exposure in normal use.
 Illuminated indicators are provided above the front door and in the top-rear
corners of the side panels.
 No attempt should be made to operate the machine with the doors open by
overriding the interlocks.
 Nothing should be done to compromise the integrity of the shielding.
 No modifications may be made to the machine without the express permission
of the manufacturer.
 Only Nordson DAGE approved replacement parts should be used to service the
machine since alternatives may result in increased radiation or degradation of
the safety features.
 An underlying principle of radiation protection is that the radiation from the
machine should be limited to 'As Low As Reasonably Achievable' (ALARA). This
principle is embodied in the machine design, but this is also a requirement of the
machine users, and appropriate guidance should be given in the local rules.
 X-ray leakage should be checked as described in the Installation and Maintenance
Guide.
X-rays are harmful to the human body.
This equipment contains an X-ray tube installed in a shielded
cabinet with safety interlocks to prevent accidental exposure
to radiation. The equipment must be checked to verify that
X-ray leakage from the shielded cabinet during operation is no
higher than 1μSv/H. If radiation is detected above this level or
a fault suspected, switch off immediately.

3.4.2. Shielding methods

The machine is lined with lead or lead glass in all areas where X-rays could
otherwise escape through the cabinet. The thickness of the lead lining varies
according to the power of the expected radiation. Generally the lead lining is thicker
at the top of the cabinet.

3.4.3. Measurement methods

Radiation leakage should be measured using either a Geiger Muller or CW tube
suitable for the measurement of 30-160kV radiation and capable of detecting
radiation at levels of less than 1μSv/h.
Note: A full leakage check procedure should be performed according to local safety
rules. Refer to the Installation and Maintenance Guide for details.
16 User Guide V21.3 Software

3.5. Statutory regulations

3.5.1. Appointed safety personnel
The cabinet has been designed to comply with appropriate US standards and UK
legislation, however the purchaser must take due account of any radiation protection
legislation in their own countries. The section below reflects the requirements of UK
legislation, which may or may not be appropriate in other countries.
Safety personnel must be appointed in accordance with local safety rules.
The rules may well require the appointment of an on-site Radiation Protection
Supervisor and a Radiation Protection Advisor.

3.5.2. Local safety rules

The operator and any other personnel in the vicinity of the machine must observe all
local safety rules in addition to the safety precautions and procedures given in this
guide.

3.6. X-ray interlocks and safety warnings

3.6.1. Interlocking methods
The machine can be powered up only when:
 The emergency power off switch (1) is in the released position.
 The key is inserted into the key-operated switch (2) and turned to either of the
'on' positions (POWER ENABLE or X-RAY ENABLE).

Note: POWER ENABLE position will not allow X-rays to be generated or the system
manipulator to be moved.
X-rays can only be generated when the machine is powered up and the following
interlocks are closed:
 The main access doors are closed.
 The sample access door is closed.
Note: These interlocks are a double-redundant, self-monitoring systems designed for
safety critical applications.
The sample access door is locked by a latch that is electrically released under
software control and cannot be opened unless a request is made by the operator via
the operator interface.
This lock system prevents uncontrolled opening of the door with the X-rays on,
which is extremely hazardous to health.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 17

3.7. Hazardous materials

3.7.1. Lead
Lead is a poisonous metal that is harmful to the human body. As it may be absorbed
through the skin it is important to wash hands after touching any part of the
lead-lining of the cabinet. The lining is not accessible during normal use.
Lead remains in the body and the effects are cumulative.
Lead can be harmful to the human body. Parts of the
cabinet are lined with lead. Care must be taken when
handling lead as it may be absorbed through the skin. After
contact wash hands thoroughly using soap or detergent.

3.7.2. Beryllium
Beryllium is harmful to the human body. Always wear gloves when handling
beryllium. Do not attempt to clean the beryllium window with any abrasive material.
Any items such as gloves, masks or cleaning materials that may have become
contaminated with beryllium must be disposed of safely.
Beryllium can be harmful to the human body. The output
window of Open Tube systems and Mk2 NT tube systems is
made of beryllium. If it is damaged or broken, take extreme
care not to inhale any Beryllium fragments or powder that
may be produced as this can cause respiratory problems.
All beryllium parts must be disposed of in accordance with
national regulations.
During normal operation, it is not possible to come into contact with Beryllium as it is
inside the X-ray machine.

3.7.3. Locking off the power

A combined main isolator and circuit breaker is located under the desk and is
accessible through the cut-out section of the small blue PC door. It has three holes
for fitting padlocks to prevent the power from being switched on by unauthorized
personnel.
18 User Guide V21.3 Software

3.8. High voltage hazard

The X-ray tube installed in this machine uses high voltages to generate an X-ray
beam. Residual high voltage may still be present on the HT connecting cable long
after the machine has been switched off. Wait for 5 minutes after power off before
dismantling either of the HT connectors, and always discharge the metal tip of the
connector to earth before handling to ensure that no residual voltage remains.
High Voltages can kill. Extremely high voltages, up to
162kV, are present in this equipment. To avoid electric
shocks, equipment panels or covers should be removed
only by qualified personnel.
 19

4. Environmental information - X-ray machines

4.1. Environmental impact statement- X-ray machines only
The X-ray machine has no impact on the environment while in use.

4.2. Safe disposal instructions- X-ray machines only

Local regulations/legislation may require additional specialist Waste Disposal of the
following lubricants or consumables used during routine maintenance. Please
consult your local Health and Safety/Environmental Officer for further advice if
necessary.

Material or Substance Area of Use Disposal

Dow Corning DC4 Electrical Wipes contaminated during Contaminated

Compound cleaning/lubricating material - Specialist
process of the HT Disposal
Connections.
Alcohol Wipes Wipes contaminated during Contaminated
cleaning/lubricating material - Specialist
process of the HT Disposal (Refer to
Connections. MSDS regarding
storage fire risk.)
Uncleaned packaging Completely empty
the container. Pass it
on to an approved
waste disposal
company.
For specialist disposal we recommend you contact either the responsible authority
or an approved and /or licensed waste disposal company, which will advise you on
the disposal of special waste.
Removal of the X-ray tube from the machine should only be undertaken by trained
personnel. Unauthorized removal will invalidate the warranty.
20 User Guide V21.3 Software
 21

5. Machine overview
The equipment has been designed to inspect and determine the quality of electronic
components. It enables, for example, the detection of:
 Joints where the solder has not flowed successfully.
 Joints where the solder has bridged the gap between two or more pads.
 Voids within soldered joints.
 Wires bent or broken by encapsulation.
The equipment generates and uses X-rays which are harmful to the human body.
The machine is designed and manufactured to minimize the escape of dangerous
radiation. No modification may be made to the machine without the permission of
the manufacturer.
Unauthorized modifications may lead to death or injury caused by radiation leakage.
The three compartments of the cabinet are radiation chamber, electronics tunnel
(housing the PC and Electronics) and HV PSU. If an open tube is fitted, the rotary
pump will be located with the HV PSU.
The power controls for the machine are mounted on the main front panel and the
front panel of the electronics tunnel.
All other control is performed through a dedicated software application, which is
operated using a keyboard, mouse and a monitor mounted on the front of the
machine.
The principal elements of the machine and their functions are outlined below.
Magnetic Samples must not be used inside the X-ray Microscope as this will cause
tube damage and will make any warranty invalid.
22 User Guide V21.3 Software

5.1. Hardware
5.1.1. Controls and Indicators

Item Description Item Description

1 Keyboard and mouse 6 X-ray on lamps (repeated on
opposite corner of machine
cabinet)
2 Power on button 7 Sample access door
3 Key-switch 8 Emergency stop button
4 Dual Monitors (if option 9 Main Power Isolator (behind door
fitted) panel)
5 X-ray on warning sign
Note: The image is typical of the XD series machines.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 23

5.1.1.1. Main isolator

A combined main isolator and circuit breaker is located behind the lower left-hand
door on the front of the machine.
Three holes are provided in the main isolator and circuit breaker for fitting padlocks
to prevent the power from being switched on by unauthorized personnel.

5.1.1.2. Key-switch and Power On button

The key-operated switch is used along with the POWER ON button to start the
machine.
POWER
ON

The functions of the various key-switch positions are outlined below, but the Power
On button must be pressed in order to start the machine.
 POWER OFF position - all functions of the machine are disabled.
The key can be removed in this position to prevent unauthorized use.
 POWER ENABLE position - the vacuum pumps and control computer are enabled,
but all motion and X-ray systems are disabled.
The key can be removed in this position to prevent unauthorized use.
 X-RAY ENABLE position - all functions of the machine become operational.
The key cannot be removed in this position.
POWER
ENABLE

POWER X-RAY
OFF ENABLE
24 User Guide V21.3 Software

5.1.1.3. Emergency stop button

This enables the machine to be switched off instantly in the event of an emergency.

5.1.1.4. Monitor
The monitors (1) are the main operator interface to the machine which uses
Microsoft Windows™ as an operating system. Dual monitors are standard on
Diamond series systems, optional on Ruby series systems and are not available on
Jade systems.

They display the X-ray images of the sample and provide the means of performing
all normal operating functions, including positioning the sample, controlling the
viewing angle and adjusting the X-ray image.
The second monitor, when fitted, allows for a larger sized scan map to be displayed
(see page 52) at all times and for some features will display the inspection results
(see page 342).

5.1.1.5. Keyboard and mouse

These are used to operate all software-controlled functions of the machine.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 25

5.1.1.6. Printer
This is an optional item which can be used to produce printed copies of the X-ray
images, with or without added captions. A USB port, for connection of the printer, is
located next to the key-switch.

5.1.1.7. Sample access door

The front door is locked by a latch that is electrically released under software
control. The latch cannot be released unless the operator releases it via the system
interface.
The lock prevents accidental opening of the sample access door. In the unlikely
event that the door opens, the X-ray system is turned off by the interlock system.
Refer to the Installation and Maintenance Guide for further details of the interlock
system.

5.1.1.8. X-ray warnings

The illuminated X-ray generation warnings on the front of the machine indicate when
X-rays have been requested (yellow), and when they are actually on (red).
Other red lamps at the top rear corners of each side of the cabinet also indicate
when X-rays are on.

5.1.2. Setting up the work station

5.1.2.1. Setting the console and monitor height
The front console and monitor heights are independently adjustable by means of
quick-release handles.
1. Press-in the release handles at both ends of the console and move the console
up or down to the required height.

2. Use the similar release handles at both sides of the monitor to adjust the
monitor to the required height.

Note: If the work station is to be configured as a standing station, the keyboard

shelf and the monitor should be set to a comfortable height within the following
limits in order to maintain compliance with SEMI S8 8.1.1 and 9.1.3

Minimum Maximum
Center of monitor 1320 1470
Keyboard shelf 940 1270
26 User Guide V21.3 Software

5.1.2.2. Positioning the keyboard and mouse

The keyboard may be positioned with the mouse either to the left or to the right for
use by left- or right-handed operators.

5.1.2.3. Setting the chair

Set the chair as follows.
1. Position the chair in front of the monitor.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable height for viewing the monitor and for using the
keyboard and mouse.
3. Adjust the seat back to an upright, but comfortable seating position.
4. Check local health and safety regulations regarding monitor, keyboard and
mouse usage.
Note: The ergonomic guidelines in SEMI S8, 10.2.3 and 10.2.4, specify a minimum
horizontal leg clearance of 508mm at knee level and of 660mm at foot level,
measured from the front edge of the keyboard shelf.
An optional adjustable shelf extension is available and should be fitted in order to
comply with this requirement.

5.2. Software interface

This topic provides a simple overview of the layout of the software interface.

Item Description
1 Menu selection
2 Mini-tabs
3 Settings area, changes to display various controls
depending on which mini-tab is selected.
4 Image capture, enhancement and recording controls, and
the dartboard.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 27

5 X-ray ON / OFF controls

6 X-ray Voltage and Power indicators
7 Right Hand Control panel
8 Main X-ray image display area
9 Message window
Buttons and mini-tab names, illustrated in items 2 and 4 are referred to by their
function. This can be displayed in a tooltip by hovering the mouse pointer over each
item.

5.2.1. Main tabs

Access the main tabs as follows.
1. Right click on the main X-ray image area and select Screens.
2. Select the applicable tab.
28 User Guide V21.3 Software

Inspect tab
Provides access to all controls for performing an inspection of a component. All the
mini-tabs, image and video controls are available from this tab.
Users tab
Allows the creation, selection and deletion of users. (see page 373)
Note: Inspect and Users are the only tabs available on Operator access levels (see
page 373).
Engineer tab
Provides access to a series of controls that enable routine maintenance to be
carried out on the machine, and a complete system health check. Refer to the
Routine maintenance section of the Installation and Maintenance Guide for more details.
This tab is only available under Engineer access.
Calibration tab
Provides the necessary controls for system calibration. Refer to the Routine
maintenance section of the Installation and Maintenance Guide for more details. This tab
is only available under Engineer access.
Options tab
Provides the selection and control of the following options (see page 368).
 Image optimization (see page 363).
 Availability of image recipe (see page 368).
 Video capture settings (see page 349).
 Low Dose Mode control (see page 371).
 Image Correction (see page 349).
 Equalization options (see page 73).
 User Login control (see page 372).
 Function accessibility for operators, supervisors and engineers.
This tab is only available for Supervisor and Engineer access levels.
Database Viewer tab
 Provides the details and the controls for the database (see page 355). This tab
is only available under Engineer access.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 29

5.2.2. Panel Activation

With both control panels activated the inspect screen is shown as below.

Both the left and right side panels can be hidden or viewed independently
depending on the size of image the user requires to view.
This can be achieved by right clicking in the image area to bring up a new menu,
30 User Guide V21.3 Software

then selecting, or deselecting, the panel to be hidden.

When each panel is hidden the image is adjusted so the parts previously off screen
are revealed.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 31

5.2.3. Right Hand Panel

The right hand panel gives access to some of the features used for general
inspection.

1 Selects the Frame Average from Live to 4096

2 Selects Live Image Smoothing ON or OFF
3 Sets and selects the required Live Image filter (see page 95)
4 Sets and selects the required Live Image dynamic Stretch Contrast
(see page 96)
5 Turns on the fixed Stretch Contrast
6 Histogram of seen image. The Green line can be grabbed and
adjusted in order to modify the seen image
7 Brightness and Contrast sliders

All the features are duplicated on the standard control panel and either set of
controls will perform the same functions. This panel can be turned off (see page 29)
if the operator requires a larger image area.
32 User Guide V21.3 Software

5.2.4. Low Resolution Monitor Option

The Jade FP system is fitted with a 1920 x 1080 resolution monitor, which effects
the way the GUI is displayed on some screens, compared to the higher resolution
1920 x 1200 pixels.
When a screen layout has been altered, the cursor icon will change to an open hand
in a clear area of the control panel.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 33

When this hand is present it is possible to grab the control panel by holding the left
mouse button down, making the cursor become a closed hand, and dragging the
panel either up or down to reveal the hidden buttons and controls.

5.2.5. Second Monitor Option

If a secondary monitor is fitted (see page 24), it can be used to display a larger
navigation map (see page 52) or live results as an Automatic Inspection Routine
(see page 342) is being executed.
This is selected from the More Options menu (see page 34).
34 User Guide V21.3 Software

5.2.6. More options menu

The More Options menu can be selected from the main Menu bar.

This will open a new window giving several user configurable options in a property
sheet style interface.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 35

The More Options menu is split into two windows and allows the user to navigate
and configure several options.
36 User Guide V21.3 Software

5.2.6.1. More Options List

The following list of settings in the More Options Menu is subject to change as
required.
1. General;
Allows changes to the system appearance and User interface.
System logging can be activated under this section.
Unused analysis tabs can be made visible or deactivated as required.
Analysis and threshold detection options can be made visible or deactivated as
required.
2. Overlays;
Allows for Font style and line colors to be adjusted for overlays used with Auto
Measurement functions.
3. Callouts;
Allows the Font style and Marker colors to be altered when used with Callouts.
Refer to 'Marking the Image' (see page 99) for more details.
4. Print;
Allows the Font styles to be adjusted for printed images. Refer to 'Printing the
Image' (see page 108) for more details.
5. Annotate;
Allows for changes to the appearance of the Annotations text boxes and font to
be made. Refer to 'Annotations' (see page 101) for more details.
6. Measure;
Allows for changes to the on screen appearance of measurements and relevant
readouts. Refer to 'Measurement Features' (see page 243) for more details.
7. Image Save;
Sets the default saved image style in Auto Inspections. Refer to 'Saving the
Image' (see page 108) for more details.
8. CAD;
Allows default values to be set for the CAD Editor (see page 199).
9. Analysis;
Allows the text labelling for BGA and QFN pins to be adjusted.
Allows the void measurement to be displayed as a relative area or an equivalent
diameter.
10. Reports;
Allows a company logo to be imported into saved images.
 37

6. Getting started
A typical work sequence is as follows.
1. Visually inspect the machine to ensure that all access panels are closed.
2. Switch on the power and wait for the machine to finish its start-up processes.
3. Warm-up the X-ray tube.
4. Load the sample.
5. Adjust the image.
6. Move the image to view the area of interest.
7. Store or print the images as required.
8. Remove/change the sample and repeat the image adjustment (if required),
move to a new area of interest and store images as required.
9. Turn off the X-rays between inspection sessions.
10. Turn the key switch to the Power Enable position if the machine is not going to
be used within 24 hours. The key can be removed to prevent unauthorized
usage.
POWER
ENABLE

POWER X-RAY
OFF ENABLE

6.1. Turning on
Turn the machine on as follows.
1. Carry out a visual check to ensure that there is no damage or evidence of
modification to the outside of the cabinet before applying power to the machine.
Any damage or modification increases the risk of radiation leakage.
2. Check that the doors closed. The main and sample access doors are fitted with
interlocks to prevent machine operation when open.
3. Remove the padlock(s), if fitted, from the main isolator.
4. Turn the main isolator switch to the on position indicated by I. If the isolator is in
the tripped position, T, turn it first to the off position, O, and then to the on
position I.

5. Check that the red Emergency Stop button has not been operated. If it has,
reset it by turning in a clockwise direction.
38 User Guide V21.3 Software

6. Insert the key in the key-switch and turn the key clockwise to X-RAY ENABLE.
POWER
ENABLE

POWER X-RAY
OFF ENABLE

7. Press the green POWER ON button.

POWER
ON

This starts the X-ray tube and powers up the machine electronics, including the
control computer and monitor.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 39

The control computer will first go through a normal Windows start-up. It is

possible that other software has been loaded onto the machine after installation
which will affect the power-up sequence. However, the Dage X-ray application
will normally start automatically, in which case the start screen will be displayed.

8. If this screen does not automatically appear, do one of the following:

 Look for the Dage X-ray icon on the desktop and double-click it to start the
application.

 Click the Windows Start button. Point to All Programs, select Dage X-ray
Systems, and then click the Dage X-ray icon.
The start screen should then appear.
40 User Guide V21.3 Software

If the system has the CT Option fitted, a new window will be displayed prior to the
Machine Initialization screen.

Figure 1: Hardware Configuration

Care should be taken to select the correct option.
After a few seconds the Machine Initialization screen will be displayed. This
displays messages showing the progress of the automatic initialization routine.

9. Click on the OK button when the message Press OK to Initialize Axes appears.
Cancel will allow the user to continue to the main application but the system will
not allow any Manipulator movement or X-ray activation. Open Door will allow the
sample door to be opened to gain access to the sample tray.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 41

The machine will reset the sample manipulator and the image intensifier
mechanisms. This takes around 90 seconds and when complete, the application
screen is displayed.

Note: The controls shown are typical for an engineer. However, Operator and
Supervisor access to various controls can be modified. Refer to Operator and
Supervisor access (see page 373) for more details.
The operating software is now ready to use.
10. Wait for the X-ray tube to reach a satisfactory vacuum level (see page 41), and
then start the warm-up procedure.

6.1.1. X-ray tube vacuum

This is for open tube systems only. Sealed-transmissive tube systems do not have
the vacuum indicator displayed, this status can only be seen from the Engineers
screen.
The machine cannot work until the x-ray tube vacuum is satisfactory. Whenever you
start-up or operate the machine, you should check the color of the vacuum indicator
(1) at the bottom of the screen and take appropriate action if it shows a low vacuum
level.

Color Significance and required action

Red No or low vacuum. The machine cannot be used. The vacuum
level should fall this low only when it has been deliberately
released for X-ray tube servicing, or when the machine has
been out of use for a period of some days.
If some maintenance has just been carried out on the X-ray
tube, or the machine has not been used for a long time, a red
indication at start-up is normal. In this case, simply wait for the
system to obtain a satisfactory vacuum level. The indicator
should change through orange to yellow and finally to green.
If the indicator stays red while the machine is operating, it must
42 User Guide V21.3 Software

be regarded as an indication of a possible system fault. In this case,

report the condition to a supervisor.
Orange Low, but improving vacuum. The machine cannot be used.
Yellow Partial vacuum, sufficient for machine use up to 100kV.
Green Satisfactory vacuum level, sufficient for machine use up to full
operating voltage.

6.1.2. Warm-up
The machine has a built-in warm-up system that gradually increases the voltage on
the X-ray tube, monitoring for arcing caused by any contamination and re-setting the
voltage when needed. It can be a quick procedure if the tube is clean, but will take
longer if arcing occurs.
It is not uncommon for internal arcing to occur in all tube types if the system has
been switched off for a period of time. Open tube systems can also exhibit arcing
after any maintenance or filament change as the internal tube surfaces may have
been contaminated with dust particles or moisture from the air.
Nordson DAGE recommends that warm-up is used at the start of every working day.
At the end of this procedure the tube will be ready for use.
In general, especially when the machine is new, there may be occasions when the
X-rays will switch off without any apparent cause. This will almost certainly be due to
an arc within the tube, although the system may actually report a bad vacuum as the
contamination is removed.
A tube warm-up request will be presented to the user once every 24 hours, with the
option to perform the warm-up or to ignore the warm-up if it is not a suitable time.
This can be deferred for up to seven days where the warm-up procedure will need to
be run in order to be able to activate X-rays.
Alternatively the warm-up procedure can be activated manually. Start the tube
warm-up procedure by selecting Menu>Tube>Warmup.
This gradually increases the voltage on the tube to its maximum rating.
Note: Depending on the length of time since last use, and whether servicing has
been performed on the tube, it may take up to 15 minutes to warm-up the tube.

6.2. Turning off

Abrupt power removal from the machine is not harmful to the system. The Windows
operating system detects this condition and runs diagnostic tests when re-started.
However, this can take some time, and data can sometimes be lost. In order to
avoid this possibility use the following procedure to turn the machine off.
1. Click the X-ray off button (1) to switch the X-rays off.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 43

When X-rays switch off, the status bar changes to gray (2) and shows both the
voltage and power indicators (3) as zero.

2. Close the Nordson DAGE application by clicking the close button in the top right
of the control panel at the left of the main image viewer.

3. A message window will be displayed asking for confirmation of the shut down
request.

Selecting 'Yes' will move the system manipulator to the park position and close
the X-ray application.
4. Click the Windows Start button at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen.

Note: If this is not visible, move the mouse to the bottom of the screen and it
should appear.
The Windows start menu will be displayed.
5. On the start menu, click Shut Down.

6. Wait until the monitor is blank or displays No Sync.

44 User Guide V21.3 Software

7. Turn the key switch to the POWER OFF position and remove the key.
POWER
ENABLE

POWER X-RAY
OFF ENABLE

8. Turn the main isolator switch to the off position indicated by O.

| ON

O
OFF

9. Fit a padlock(s) to the main isolator before leaving the machine.

6.3. Switching off in an emergency

Press the top of the emergency stop button (1) to switch off the machine in an
emergency.

This will shut the machine down instantly and remove power from all components.
Before the machine can be restarted, the Emergency Stop button must be reset by
turning it clockwise (2). The machine is started in the usual way with the addition
that the Windows operating systems will run some self-diagnostic tests to check for
any errors.

6.4. Loading/unloading a sample

Load or unload a sample as follows.
1. Click the door release button to switch off the X-rays and release the door.

Wait for the sample holder to move to the load position and open the door.
If the door is not opened within 20 seconds, it is automatically re-locked.
2. Place the sample on the sample holder, 20mm from the front left-hand corner. A
plastic 'L' is supplied with the system to facilitate this. This allows for oblique
views (see page 58) to be used if required without the tray support impeding the
image.
3. Close the front door.
Note: A warning box indicating the current maximum sample height is displayed
on-screen every time the sample door is opened.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 45

The maximum height of the part must not exceed that

stated in the warning box. Severe damage can result if
this limit is exceeded. Your engineer can set the
machine to accommodate parts up to 200mm in height
(see page 47), as measured from the base of the tray
Consult your line engineer before loading any oversized
parts.

6.4.1. Maximizing magnification

Position the feature of interest as close to the X-ray tube target as possible in order
to achieve maximum magnification.

Example 1a Example 1b
The sample (1) is simply placed on The sample is inverted to position the
sample holder (2), but feature of interest closer to the tube to
magnification of the feature of improve magnification.
interest (3) is limited.

Example 1c
The sample is modified to bring the
feature of interest closer still to the
tube.

Samples must not protrude below the lower surface of the sample tray, as this may cause damage to the tube and invalidate warranty.
46 User Guide V21.3 Software

6.5. Sample holders

The sample holder can be one of three types:
 A flat aluminum plate insulated on the underside.
 A carbon fiber plate which is very transparent to X-rays.
 A custom manufactured tooling jig.
For the first two types the sample can simply be placed onto the flat surface.
The third type will have mounting points or edges for the precise location of
samples.
Do not use the supplied steel calibration plate as this will block most of the X-rays.
All sample holders fit into the sample manipulator through the machine front door,
and are located in the manipulator by two pins.
Additional (blank) sample holders must be purchased for your system from Nordson
DAGE. Please contact Nordson DAGE Customer Service and inform them of your
system model number and serial number to ensure the correct sample holder is
supplied.
Sample holders with custom fitments for increased accuracy are available from
Nordson DAGE.
Do not modify your sample tray without prior permission from Nordson DAGE UK or
the warranty will be invalid.

6.5.1. Removing or refitting a sample holder

1. Click the door release button to switch off the X-rays and release the door.

Wait for the sample holder to move to the load position and open the door.
If the door is not opened within 20 seconds, it is automatically re-locked.
When the door release button is clicked, the machine moves the sample
manipulator to the correct position for access to the sample holder. Further
movement is disabled while the door is open.
2. Lift the sample holder (2) off the two locating pins (3).
3. Refit by the reverse procedure.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 47

6.5.2. Over-height samples

Over-height samples can be fitted to the machine, but extreme caution is required.
Change the clearance height as follows.
1. Measure the maximum height of the part in millimeters.
2. Select Supervisor level access.
3. Select the Options tab, and set the Clearance height (mm) to the desired value (see
page 368).
Note: The absolute maximum height setting is 200mm.
At increased sample clearance heights, lower magnification views and some
larger oblique angle views may be restricted to ensure the sample cannot clash
with any part of the system mechanism. In addition, when scanning to make a
navigation map more images will be taken, extending the time taken.

4. Load and inspect the sample as normal.

6.5.3. Customizing for low density samples

When imaging low density samples, the X-ray absorption of the sample plate can be
many times greater than that of the feature of interest.
Usually, in these cases, using Stretch Contrast can be very effective in revealing
detail.
However, in extreme cases, an alternative sample holder design may help produce
a better image.
Special carbon fiber sample holders that have a much lower X-ray absorption
coefficient are supplied as standard with Diamond series systems, or may be
purchased separately from Nordson DAGE.
Additional (blank) sample holders may be purchased for your system from Nordson
DAGE. Please contact Nordson DAGE Customer Service and inform them of your
system model number and serial number to ensure the correct sample holder is
supplied.
Note: Nordson DAGE offer a customization service – see your local Nordson DAGE
representative.
48 User Guide V21.3 Software
 49

7. Inspecting a sample
All of the X-ray inspection process can be performed using the monitor and mouse.
The keyboard is only used occasionally, for example, for naming image files.
This section provides a step-by-step guide to sample inspection.

7.1. Getting ready

1. Load a part.
2. Make sure the machine is warmed-up (see page 42).
3. Right click on the image area of the main screen and select Screens>Users
option.
The system may not have been configured to record individual users. In this
case, continue to use the system as described in 'Switching on the X-rays'. (see
page 50)
4. Select your name from the list.
The current user’s full name is displayed in the title bar of the main application.
5. If your name does not exist, then type your details in the two boxes and click
Save User.
Depending on your user access level the application screen may show up a
number of options, each of which gives access to a different range of controls.
Operators will usually only see the Inspect and Users options from the Screens
option.

Further information is available on setting your user access level (see page
373).
50 User Guide V21.3 Software

7.2. Switching on the X-rays

Switch on the X-rays by one of the following methods.

 Click General Viewing button, if the recipe options are

being displayed.
 Click the X-ray on button.

X-rays will be switched on only if:

 The sample door is closed and locked.
 The tube vacuum level is adequate.
The status bar and PRE-WARN lamp turn yellow meaning that X-rays are about to be
generated.

The status bar and the X-ray ON lamp above the sample access door, will shortly
change to red meaning that X-rays can now be generated.
The voltage and power indicators will increase to show the actual tube voltage and
power levels.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 51

7.2.1. Getting a picture

If no picture appears, then check the following items.
Note: It may take several seconds for a picture to appear on the screen
 Move the mouse pointer over the picture, press and release the left button.
This will take a new image of the part.
 Check that the power slider is at least one-third from the left end.

 for 3W tubes.

 for 10W tubes.

 Select Menu>Tube>Center option.

X-rays need to be active for this option to be available.

This makes an automatic adjustment to the tube calibration.
After 10 seconds or so the power output should be restored.
If there is still no picture, then the part may be thicker and will require higher voltage
X-rays. Consult your line engineer as there may already be a better setting
available.
Otherwise, increase the power further.
If there is any reason why the X-ray tube cannot be switched on, a message will be
shown in the message window.
52 User Guide V21.3 Software

7.3. Making a navigation map

A patented feature1 of the Nordson DAGE XD series is the ability to create a sample
navigation and fault location X-ray map. This provides the user with a method of
rapid movement to different Regions Of Interest (ROI) on the sample through a
simple mouse click. In addition, the area being inspected is highlighted through a
red rectangle that is superimposed on the navigation map. As the magnification
changes, the rectangle adjusts in size so as to be consistent with the area being
viewed relative to the fault and, as such, can be saved along with the X-ray image to
allow prompt identification for sample repair and re-work following inspection.
Maps can be saved and recalled as part of automated inspection sequences (see
page 265).
The navigation map is produced from smaller X-ray images, like a mosaic. The
software uses the difference in contrast, between the sample image and the
background, to differentiate what is and is not included as part of the 'Scan Board'
navigation map (see page 53). The currently selected tube voltage and power
settings are used.
It may be necessary to alter the tube voltage and power values so as to make the
sample more clearly visible and produce the best navigation map.
For low contrast samples, it is possible to adjust the fixed Stretch Contrast (see
page 76) settings prior to making the navigation map.
1. Load the sample into the machine preferably 20mm from the left-front corner of
the sample holder. A plastic 'L' position guide is supplied to assist with this.
2. Click the Inspect tab.
3. Switch on the X-rays by selecting the General Viewing button unless otherwise
instructed by your line engineer. There will be a short delay of around 5 seconds
until the X-rays start.
4. Select the Board Image tab.

1
Navigation Map patent - EP 2063261
 User Guide V21.3 Software 53

The machine is now ready to make a map of the part.

The mapping function works by taking several pictures of the sample or samples,
joining them together in a mosaic.
As the magnification of the part changes with height, tall parts will not be
represented with total accuracy, and some of the scans will overlap slightly.
This effect will not detract from the main use of the map, i.e. gross navigation.
There are two methods available for making the map.
 Scan Board (see page 53)
 Scan full (see page 53)
It is not possible to create a navigation map if the X-rays are turned off or any
Dynamic Stretch Contrast option is selected. Scanmap functionality is also disabled
if the system is set to 'Live' mode.
For samples that are low in contrast, for example a pcb with several copper tracks
and multiple layers but few components attached, it is possible to produce a
navigation map using the Classic Stretch Contrast (see page 76) feature.

7.3.1. Scan Board

Activate a scan of the board as follows.
1. Click the Scan Board button.

This searches the sample holder for the product, starting at the left-front corner.
If the current image is similar in contrast to the background then this section will
not be considered to be part of the navigation map.
By using this rule and following a predetermined search pattern the machine
finds the sample or samples.
If there are two or more samples on the sample holder that are separated by
more than 60mm, the machine may not include the additional objects in the
navigation map beyond that found in the lower left corner of the sample holder.
In this case, either move the samples closer together or use Scan Full (see page
53).

7.3.2. Scan Full

Activate a full scan of the sample holder as follows.
1. Click the Scan Full button.

This will scan the full working area of the machine.

54 User Guide V21.3 Software

It usually takes a longer time, but always shows everything on the sample
holder.

The map display area may be replaced by other tools, but can always be restored
by pressing the map mini tab.

Two other controls affect the speed of mapping and the resolution of the resulting
map. These controls are as follows.
 Live mapping (see page 54)
 High res. map (see page 55)

7.3.3. Live Mapping

If this option is selected the system will be put into live averaging mode and the tube
and oblique controls will be disabled. The map will then be updated every time that
the system comes to rest at a new location.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 55

7.3.4. High res. map

When this option is selected, followed by choosing the scale factor in the adjacent
control which becomes available, the board map will be created, and can be stored,
at a higher resolution compared to the standard method. The drop down list of the
scale factor gives a choice of 4,2,or 1. A scale factor of 4 is the lowest image quality
setting available and will create the smallest total image size compared to a scale
factor of 1.
A scale factor of 1 should only be used to create maps of small objects as it will take a long
time to create the map using this setting.
The High res. map option also uses the set Frame Averaging, so a high frame
average will cause the scan map creation to take a very long time.

7.4. Selecting what to see

7.4.1. Using the map
The navigation map is used as follows.
1. Double-click the left mouse button on a point of interest on the map.

The machine manipulator will move to the area of interest, and the red rectangle
on the map will show where you are looking.
A particular area or detail can be viewed as follows.
1. Move the mouse pointer to one corner of the area of interest
2. Press and hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to drag a new red
rectangle.
3. Release the left button and then press the right mouse button to move to that
point.
56 User Guide V21.3 Software

The area you have selected (1) will be shown in the main display, and the
picture clarity will improve over a few seconds as the image processor cleans up
the picture.

If the second monitor is fitted and set to display as Reference in the More Options
menu (see page 34) then it is possible to use the larger navigation map as
described above.

7.4.2. Adjusting the brightness of the image

Using the General Viewing button at the top of the image area of the screen, it is
usually possible to see a wide variety of different parts. However, the image may be
generally too bright or too dark.
Slide the Power control to the left or right to decrease or increase the image
brightness.

3W tube systems.

10W tube systems.

This operates just like a brightness control on a TV.
Note: When changed, there is a delay of a few seconds before the image stabilizes.
Later sections will explain how contrast and brightness can be boosted in the image
processor, but it is always better to get the best basic image.
If the part cannot be seen, and you are unfamiliar with the operation of the machine,
then consult your line engineer. There may be a better setting choice available.

7.4.3. Moving the picture around

It is also possible to move the part around using the mouse on the main image.
There are two modes of operation:
 Mouse drag (see page 57)
 Mouse joystick (see page 57)
 User Guide V21.3 Software 57

7.4.3.1. Mouse Drag

1. Move the mouse pointer over the main picture and click the right mouse button.
A small menu will appear.

2. Select Mouse drag mode.

In this mode two movements are possible:
 Point the mouse to a feature of interest on the main picture and double-click
the left mouse button. The feature you have selected will move to the center
of the screen.
 Point the mouse to a feature of interest on the main picture and press and
hold the left mouse button.
The feature you have selected will be dragged by the mouse pointer until the
button is released.

7.4.3.2. Mouse Joystick

1. Select Mouse joystick mode.

The left button double-click operates as before as described in mouse drag

above.
The mouse now also operates as a joystick, controlling the speed and direction
of the part movement. Movement is controlled as follows.
58 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Press and hold the left mouse button and move the mouse forward a little.
You will note that the mouse pointer has jumped to the center of the main
display screen.
3. Still holding the button down, try moving the mouse around the screen.
The part moves on-screen in the direction the mouse is moving towards and at
a progressively increasing speed that depends on how far away the mouse is
from the center of the image.
4. Release the mouse button to stop the movement.
This mode is useful for scanning along rows of components, although the image
will remain in Live mode (see page 75) until the movement is stopped.

7.4.3.3. Hardware joystick option

An option is available for the addition of a single hardware joystick or a pair of
hardware joysticks. These will work in the way described for the mouse joystick.
One joystick will control the manipulator table X-Y axis whilst a second joystick (if
present) will control the magnification / zoom (Z-axis). Contact your Nordson DAGE
representative for further details.
The joystick functionality can be set through the More Options menu (see page 34).

7.4.4. Changing the magnification

Once the area of interest has been selected, it is possible to zoom in or out as
required.
Simply roll the wheel between the buttons on the mouse.
Roll forward to increase the magnification or back to reduce.
The system will either zoom about the object under the mouse pointer or the center
of the screen. This choice is selected from the More Options menu. (see page 34)

7.4.5. Viewing at an angle

One of the most useful features of the XD series machines is the ability to view at an
angle of up to 70 degrees anywhere within the defined inspection area without
compromising the available magnification.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 59

Item Description
1 Detector in normal position
2 Sample
3 Machine frame
4 Detector at extreme position.
5 X-ray tube

The object of interest will stay in the picture provided the height has been set (see
page 60).
There are three ways of selecting the viewing angle:
 Using the "dartboard"
 Using the image
 Using the controls in the measurement tab (see page 245)
Using the dartboard
1. Choose a part to view at low magnification.
2. Click the left mouse button anywhere on the dartboard.

The angle of view will change automatically as selected.

3. Click on the green buttons to view from the cardinal points or for an overhead
view.
The red X shows the current view position.
If the keyboard shift key is held down while the mouse is over the dartboard,
then the sensitivity of movement is increase by a factor of ten.
Each ring represents one degree of movement from the current position.

Using the image

Note: The wheel on the mouse is also a button.
1. Place the mouse pointer on the picture – e.g. on the left.
2. Double-click the mouse wheel button and the angle will change to view from the
left.
The position of the mouse pointer works like the dartboard with the center of the
screen being the normal, directly above, position.
The red X on the dartboard represents the position selected.
60 User Guide V21.3 Software

This method is somewhat quicker for experienced operators.

7.4.6. Iso-centric oblique angle viewing or 'Setting the Height'

The geometric magnification of a feature depends on how close it is to the X-ray
tube.
For example, features on the top side of a PCB (side facing the detector) will appear
at a lower magnification in the x-ray image than those on the bottom side.
As many features of differing heights may be visible at any time, the system needs
to know the height of the feature of interest, for the following reasons:
 Accurate measurements, such as for linear distances and BGA ball size.
 Calibration of the scale rule.

This needs to be selected from the Options screen before it is displayed.

 Ensuring that all features at a particular height in a sample, for example side 1
components on a PCB, remain in the field of view as an oblique angle view is
taken or changed (providing iso-centric motion.).
As a corollary of setting the height correctly, objects that do not remain in the
field of view as the oblique angle is changed, explicitly indicates that they are at
a different height within the sample when compared to the reference, for
example on side 2 of the PCB.
This allows the users to differentiate quickly between the different layers within
the sample.
Setting the height is achieved as follows:
1. Avoid maximum magnification, but ensure the item of interest is clearly visible
and broadly in the center of the field of view.
2. Click the Set Height button.

3. Find a feature at the height required that will be clearly visible from all angles,
preferably a vertical or corner feature.
4. Left click as precisely as possible on this point.
The system will then move the sample tray a preset distance.
5. Left click on the new location of the selected feature.
The sample tray will then be moved again by a preset distance. Again the user
must select the new location of the selected feature. This procedure will need to
be repeated several times and for each click the sample tray will be moved until
the selected object reaches the edge of the visible screen.
6. On the final click the machine will have calculated the height of the feature and
the selected object will be moved back to the center of the screen.
The height is now set, and will be valid for any features at the same height.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 61

An alternative method of setting the height is available and can be accessed by

holding the shift key at the same time as pressing the Set Height button.
1. Avoid maximum magnification, but ensure the item of interest is clearly visible
and broadly in the center of the field of view.
2. Hold the shift key and click the Set Height button.

3. Find a feature at the height required that will be clearly visible from all angles,
preferably a vertical or corner feature.
4. Left click as precisely as possible on this point.
The system will then move the detector. This may cause the selected feature to
move on-screen.
5. Left click on the new location of the selected feature.
The detector will then be moved again to a greater angle. Again the user must
select the new location of the selected feature. This procedure will need to be
repeated several times.
6. On the final (seventh) click the machine will have calculated the height of the
feature of interest and return the detector to the vertical position.
If the previous set height is substantially different from the new requirement, it
may cause the selected feature to move off-screen before completing the seven
set height iterations.
7. In this case, left click as close as possible to the edge of the X-ray image in the
direction that the feature disappeared until all of the set height iterations have
completed.
8. Then repeat the whole set height operation. The displacement will reduce as the
set height gets closer to the correct value.
The height is now set, and will be valid for any features at the same height.
It is possible to review and change the Set Height on the Measurements (see page
245) minitab.
Either method will work well and will depend on the users preference.

7.4.7. Setting an orbit

The system allows for a live image to be viewed whilst the system orbits around a
part at an oblique view. This functionality gives the operator a 3-D perspective.
An orbit is set as follows.
1. Perform a set height for the object of interest as described above.
2. Select the desired oblique view, either using the dartboard or by clicking the
mouse wheel.

3. Select the direction of orbit.

4. Select the orbit speed, 1 = slowest to 9 = fastest.

Once the orbit has been setup motion is started and stopped using the orbit
button. When the system is orbiting the button changes to indicate that the
function is active.
62 User Guide V21.3 Software

Orbit not functioning Orbit functioning

During orbiting most of the system controls will be disabled, the controls will
become re-enabled when motion ceases.
The orbit controls are only enabled at oblique views.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 63

8. Adjusting for the best image

Several factors contribute to the 'ideal' image. The most important of these are:
 Tube voltage and power
 Image enhancements (see page 75)
The setting of the tube voltage and power requires some knowledge of X-ray
imaging and the operation of the machine. However, for the casual or inexperienced
user pre-configured settings are available either from a list (see page 65) or using
one of the buttons (see page 66).

8.1. Using the imaging wizard

8.1.1. Quick guide
The image wizard is used to establish a set of machine settings, termed a recipe, to
give a good picture of the part presented.
Before starting the image wizard do the following.
1. Load a part.
2. Turn on the X-rays. (see page 50)
3. Make a navigation map. (see page 52)
4. Decide on the specific area of interest (see page 55).
Note: Position the region of interest in the center of the main screen.
Using the image wizard
1. Select the Image Wizard mini tab.

2. Click the Start button.

3. The machine performs an automatic process to determine the best tube settings
based on the part being viewed including the level of magnification. If this is
changed significantly, then the image enhancement selected may be
inappropriate.
After determining most of the correct settings, four images are shown with
different contrast and brightness settings.
The top left image is set so that the darkest part of the image is black on the
screen, and the lightest part of the image white.
64 User Guide V21.3 Software

In the other three images, the brightness and contrast are adjusted to
deliberately enhance low, medium or higher intensity objects.

4. Point to the image that best shows the detail required in the image and click the
left mouse button.
The images are now re-drawn with a finer level of adjustment.
The top left image is the original selected in the previous step.
5. Choose the image that best suits the feature being inspected by clicking the left
mouse button over the image.
All of the machine settings are now set as the machine recipe, and the view can
be moved as normal to another part of the device.
The new settings are applied to the current image by moving the mouse over
the image then pressing and releasing the left mouse button.
Pressing the Stop button at any time during the Wizard will stop the routine and
revert the system to the previous settings.
If required, the machine settings can be changed. Alternatively this recipe may be
given a name and saved for future use.
The image wizard results are also automatically saved as a recipe named Last Image
Wizard Result.

8.1.2. How it works

The machine follows an automatic sequence of steps that determine the following
parameters.
 Tube voltage
The image wizard process uses one of four preset voltages, namely 60, 80, 100
and 120kV.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 65

Starting at the lowest voltage the system looks for X-ray penetration through the
darkest (thickest) part of the sample. If there is insufficient penetration, then the
voltage is increased.
 Tube power
The power is increased as far as possible whilst ensuring that no part of the
image is saturated.
 Contrast stretch
The contrast is initially stretched so that the darkest part of the image is black on
the screen, and the lightest white.
 Image averaging
From the amount of contrast stretching applied, the noise in the image can be
calculated. The number of frames to average is calculated to reduce this noise
to a reasonable level.
 Operator choice
The remaining part of the process is left to the operator to choose as the final
choice depends on the feature being viewed and personal preference.
The image processing capability of the Nordson DAGE system means that particular
intensity levels in the image can be considerably enhanced without significantly
increasing the noise levels.
Note: The images that are displayed are full-resolution. However due to limited
screen space, only the center of the main image can be shown.
This whole process can take 30 seconds or more, but will probably only be used to
establish a process as all of these settings can be saved to a named machine recipe
and recalled at any time.
The image averaging may have been determined to be, for example, 512. However,
to save time the image is not refreshed on the screen during operation of the wizard
and therefore may look noisy.
Refresh the image by moving the mouse over the image and then pressing and
releasing the left button.

8.2. Choosing a pre-configured setting

Any configuration of machine image settings can be named and recalled at any
time.
There is no limit to the number of setting configurations that can be saved.

8.2.1. Choosing from the list

1. Right click on the X-ray image section and select Recipe Options.
The recipes bar will be displayed as a floating tool bar.
66 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Click on the list button to show the choices available.

3. Make a selection from the list using the mouse.

The machine will immediately load the new settings and the recipes toolbar will
disappear from view again.
Note: This may take up to 5 seconds.

8.2.2. Choosing from the buttons

There are four buttons, accessed by right clicking on the image panel, that can be
assigned to a configuration.

These settings can be made by your line engineer and are used to provide rapid
recall of popular configurations. These four recipe buttons can be removed from
view by disabling them in the Show Controls section under the Options tab.

Simply click the button of choice and the configuration will be automatically set on
the machine.
Note: This may take up to 5 seconds.
The General Viewing button recalls an in-built recipe that will give a picture on a wide
variety of different products.
It is often used as a starting point for inspections.
It is also possible to assign a new set of values to one of the buttons except the
General Viewing button.
The General Viewing button cannot be disabled from view.

8.3. Setting the tube manually

Many of the X-ray tube settings are achieved automatically or using a wizard as
described in other sections.
For advanced users it is possible to adjust some of these settings manually.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 67

8.3.1. Image quality settings

Important factors that affect image quality are as follows.
 Tube voltage and power settings – optimizing contrast.
 Part positioning and sample holder – minimizing absorption and maximizing
magnification.
 Tube focus – for high magnification applications; see the Installation and
Maintenance Guide.
 Contrast stretching – improving contrast on the areas of interest.
 Image averaging – reducing the noise level in the image (see page 75).
 Image enhancements – emphasizing particular detail in the image (see page
75).
 Equalization – further noise reduction of difficult images (see page 68).
Some of these adjustments are interrelated and only time and experience will lead
to a complete understanding. However the guidelines given below will help speed
this process.
There is a natural order to the adjustments required, and this procedure will suit
most cases.
1. Set the following.
 Averaging to 32
 Stretch contrast off
 Image enhancement off
 Color off
 3D off
2. Position the area of interest and adjust the tube voltage and power for best
contrast on the inspection point (see page 56).
3. Turn on stretch contrast.
The contrast will be enhanced automatically, but manual adjustment is also
beneficial.
4. Increase the averaging if the image appears grainy.
5. Turn on image enhancement.
The choice of filter is usually dependent on the magnification. The first three
filters in the enhancements list are selected dependant on the part
magnification.
Other more general purpose filters are available. The terms fast, medium and
slow refer to how sharp the edges of the features on the part are. A slow filter
will enhance slightly fuzzy detail (slow changes) whilst attenuating sharp detail.
This is useful at high magnification where sharp detail in the image is usually
just noise. New image filters can be created (see page 88).
6. Adjust the amount of image enhancement applied and, if necessary, further
increase the averaging and adjust the contrast.
68 User Guide V21.3 Software

7. If high magnification images seem blurred, the tube may need optimizing at the
current settings (see page 363) or the system may already be at maximum
resolution.
8. Low contrast, high magnification images are the most difficult to resolve.
Consider using a carbon-fiber sample holder.
Contact your local NordsonDAGE representative for further information.

8.3.2. Gray scale equalization

When averaging a large number of pictures the image may still not be completely
uniform even with no part in the machine.
This non-uniformity may be a gradual fall-off in sensitivity at the edge of the Image
Intensifier (shading), or more random in nature due to variation in camera pixel
sensitivity (fixed pattern noise). It may also be caused by variance in the
manufacturing process of a Flat Panel Detector (FPD) and the variation of x-rays
hitting the detector.
These variations are small, but become significant when random noise is removed
by averaging over 128 pictures or greater.
For either case, if these variations are consistent, they can be substantially reduced
in a process called equalization.
The nature of the shading error in the detector depends on the X-ray energy and
therefore the software applies equalization calculated for each 5kV step.
In order to calculate the corrections required, various images are needed:
 a dark reference image (X-rays off).
 a series of bright, but not saturated, reference images at each 5kV step. Each
image is taken at a different power level as the detector reacts differently with
X-ray intensity.
The machine calculates an offset and scaling for each pixel in the detector to correct
for differences in sensitivity across the voltage range.

8.3.2.1. Automatically setting the equalization images

This is part of the automatic optimization procedure.

8.3.2.2. Setting the dark equalization image manually

This can only be performed with Engineer access.
1. Turn off the X-rays.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 69

2. As these images must be as free as possible from random noise, set the image
averaging to 1024 for systems fitted with an Image Intensifier, or 256 for FPD.

3. Select the Menu>Images>Save Equalize Dark Image menu option.

It is not necessary to wait for the averaging to complete before selecting Save
Equalize Dark Image.
4. Wait for the average to complete shown by a green image progress indicator.

A message will be displayed stating 'Waiting for image averaging to finish'.

70 User Guide V21.3 Software

5. Once the equalization image has been acquired a new message will be
displayed stating 'Dark Correction Image Saved' and a tick will be shown in the
menu option.

8.3.2.3. Setting the bright equalization image manually

This can only be performed with Engineer access.
There is a slight difference in the correction depending on whether the sample
holder is present or not. In general, the best images are made without the aluminum
sample holder being in the X-ray path i.e. either a hole for custom tooling has been
made, or a carbon fiber holder is being used.
The automatic tube optimization procedure takes the equalization image through a
hole in the focus aid assembly.
However it is possible to characterize and remove the effects of the tooling plate
using this manual procedure.
1. Turn on the X-ray for each tube voltage of interest.
2. Make sure the intensifier is viewing directly above the tube and at low
magnification.
3. Ensure that there is no part, however faint, between the tube and the intensifier.
4. Set averaging to Live.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 71

5. Set the power level so that the gray level (1) is approximately 80% gray scale in
the center of the screen as indicated by the 'Pixel Measurements' tool under the
measurements tab. All areas of the picture must be darker than white.

6. Set the averaging to 1024 for systems fitted with an Image Intensifier, or 256 for
Flat Panel Detector systems.
7. Select the Menu>Images>Save Equalize ???kV Bright Image menu option.

It is not necessary to wait for the averaging to complete before selecting Save
Equalize ???kV Bright Image.
8. Wait for the average to complete shown by a green image progress indicator.

A message will be displayed stating 'Waiting for image averaging to finish'.

72 User Guide V21.3 Software

9. Once the equalization image has been acquired a new message will be
displayed stating 'Bright Correction Image Saved' and a tick will be shown in the
menu option.

If a tick is shown in parenthesis then an equalization image from an adjacent

voltage is being used.

A manually generated Bright Image Equalization will only be applied when either II
(Classic) Equalization or Auto Correlation is selected (see page 73).

8.3.2.4. Applying image equalization

Equalization will automatically be applied with an Averaged image, provided there
are suitable equalization images saved.
Note: Equalization can change the gray levels slightly. Therefore, with extreme levels
of contrast stretch, a change in brightness will be seen from live to averaged values.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 73

8.3.2.5. Bright/Dark Image Equalization and Noise Pattern Correlation

The Equalization can be applied in two different ways or turned off completely.
These can be set under Engineer access only and are shown on the Options Tab.
The information shown, will depend on the type of detector fitted into the system.

Flat Panel Detector option Image Intensifier option

When an equalization image is applied the software uses the chosen method and
adjusts the saved equalization image to minimize the effects of any background
noise in the viewed image.
The different selections can be chosen from the drop down list. The choices shown
will depend on which detector is fitted.

Flat Panel Detector option Image Intensifier option

II (Classic) Equalization A fixed Bright/Dark equalization. This is

good for acquiring golden images when
using an Image Intensifier system but will
need to be refreshed after 30 minutes to
get the optimum image.
Auto Correlation Small adjustments are made
automatically to compensate for noise
pattern drift in the system. This is good
when a CT option is fitted with an Image
Intensifier system and long acquisitions
are required.
Manual Correlation This allows for manual adjustment of the
noise pattern alignment.
When this option is selected, manual
adjustments can be entered for the X
and Y shift of the noise pattern drift.
74 User Guide V21.3 Software

FPD (Z) Equalization This uses a series of images acquired

over a range of power levels to account
for a variation in linearity with x-ray
intensity.
No Equalization No equalization is used.
When Equalization images are valid for the method of Equalization required the text
will change to read Equalization (Active).

Flat Panel Detector option Image Intensifier option

For normal operation it is recommended the Equalization is set to Classic
Equalization for Image Intensifier systems and FPD (Z) Equalization for Flat Panel
Detector systems.

8.4. Automatic image processing

Some of the buttons on the inspect screen have colored status lamps.
These indicate whether the selected process is waiting or complete.
Yellow means wait
Green means
complete
In addition, there will usually be a text message giving the current status.

The sequence is as follows:

1. The machine recognizes that the part is not being moved.
2. The image averaging starts.
3. Once the image averaging is complete, the image processing starts and the
indicator changes to amber.
4. The final processed image is displayed and the indicator changes to green.
The designated levels of automatic image processing, once set, will continue to
be applied to the on-screen image once movement and averaging have been
completed. This allows the user to look quickly at similar locations on different
samples in the same way without needing to alter/modify the image processing.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 75

8.5. Adding additional image enhancements

8.5.1. Noise reduction
8.5.1.1. The effects of noise
Noise in the image is an inherent part of X-ray imaging due to the nature of the
X-rays and the imaging devices used.
A similar effect is seen with TV pictures taken in very low light using an optical
image intensifier.
The best method of overcoming noise is to average the results of several pictures
where, in general, the noise level is reduced.
Noise in a picture is often made worse by image enhancement because defects, like
noise, are often very slight changes in intensity, and the system cannot distinguish
between them in the picture.
The noise in a picture can be reduced further by increasing the image averaging
(see page 75). However the time taken to acquire the image will take longer.
Note: The system will only apply 'static enhancements' when the averaging is
complete. This is not true for 'dynamic stretching' and Live Image Enhancements.

8.5.1.2. Image averaging

A live picture from the image intensifier is usually noisy, but this can be substantially
reduced by averaging over a number of picture frames.
The number of pictures averaged can be adjusted to suit the type of inspection
being performed. Higher numbers give smoother images, but require more time.
Typically, 32 pictures are averaged. However, when working on very low contrast
images, maybe at high magnification, averages can be made of up to 4096 pictures.
These can be set by using the Avg drop down list.
In these difficult cases, it is usual to set up the view with a low number whilst
fine-tuning the contrast and image enhancement settings, then increase to a higher
number.

An indicator, to the right of the tube power display, shows you how the averaging is
progressing.
76 User Guide V21.3 Software

This indicator is completely green when averaging is complete but is shown as a

light brown color as the averaging progresses, .

With averaged images, a compensation system called equalization is applied. This
compensates for slight differences in sensitivity in the camera between individual
picture elements or pixels. This will cause a slight change in the overall intensity of
the picture as it is applied, and may require a slight adjustment of the contrast
settings.

8.5.2. Camera Gain Adjustment

This only applies to Image Intensifier systems.
In normal operation the camera default setting is Low Noise, and this setting is
suitable for most applications.
Sometimes it is desirable to reduce the camera gain even further to eliminate any
noise for very bright images or to increase the camera gain for very dark images.
There are four options for adjusting the camera gain; Very Low Noise (which sets the
gain to 0%), Low Noise (which sets the gain to approximately 50% and is the default),
High Gain (which sets the gain to 100%) and Custom. These can be accessed from
the Camera Gain Settings section under the Options tab. This is only accessible with
Supervisor or Engineer access.

If the Camera Gain Settings are altered the system will need to have the Dark Image
Equalization (see page 68) and the Bright Image Equalization (see page 70) set
again, therefore, this should only be adjusted if absolutely necessary.
If the Custom setting is chosen, the camera gain can be adjusted by accessing the
Image Optimization mini tab under the Inspect screen.

8.5.3. Adjusting the contrast

Most images will look better when the brightness and contrast are adjusted.
Contrast stretching is one of the most useful tools for revealing defects.
1. Select an image, referring again to setting the tube (see page 56).
 User Guide V21.3 Software 77

2. Click the Stretch Contrast button, from the left hand panel or

from the right hand panel if it is displayed.

Once activated the button LED will turn green on both panels.
Initially an automatic adjustment is made which makes the darkest part of the
picture black, and the lightest white. These settings will be preserved even if you
move the part.
Before After

3. Manual adjustments can be made to the stretch and gamma via several
methods.
a) Use of the 'Brightness' and 'Contrast' sliders on the 'Image Processing'
minitab or the right hand panel if it is displayed.
b) Clicking and grabbing on the green line of the histogram on either the 'Image
Processing' minitab or the right hand panel if it is displayed.
c) Selecting a Live Contrast Stretching option from the 'Image Processing'
minitab or the right hand panel if it is displayed.
d) Adjusting the White, Black or Gamma (50% gray level) sliders on the Classic
Stretch Contrast minitab if it is displayed. The Classic Stretch Contrast
minitab can be turned on or off from the More Options menu (see page 34).
8.5.3.1. Brightness and Contrast adjustment
A pair of sliders allow the user to adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the seen
image. These changes will effect both live images and averaged images.
78 User Guide V21.3 Software

Pressing the Reset button between the two sliders will set both sliders to the mid
position. These controls are repeated on both the Image Processing minitab and, if
displayed, the right hand control panel too.
The stretch contrast button does not need to be active before making any
adjustments using the sliders. Moving the sliders will automatically activate the
stretch contrast.

8.5.3.2. Histogram Adjustment

This is a graphical representation of the gray scale levels for the displayed image
with a green line superimposed diagonally across it. This feature is repeated on both
the Image Processing minitab and, if displayed, the right hand control panel as well.
There is also the option to have the histogram displayed as a large floating window.
This can be selected from the right mouse button context window.

Once activated this can be dragged to any location on the monitor or monitors, and
resized as required.
All three histogram displays work identically.

Using the left mouse button, it is possible to create 'handles' along the green line.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 79

These 'handles' can be selected by holding the left mouse button down and
dragging the handle to the desired position. The displayed image will be updated as
the 'handle' is moved. Releasing the mouse button will set the handle.

'Handles' can be deleted by using the right mouse button on the handle to be
removed. As many handles can be created as required by the user to obtain the
desired result. Pressing the Reset button beneath the histogram display or
deactivating the Stretch Contrast button will reset the green line to the default
position and remove all 'handles'.

8.5.3.3. Live Contrast Stretching

A choice of three methods of Live Contrast Stretching can be selected from the drop
down list. This feature is repeated on both the Image Processing minitab and, if
displayed, the right hand control panel as well.

Refer to Stretch Contrast Filters (see page 96) for more detail.

8.5.3.4. Stretch Contrast minitab

Normally the Stretch Contrast minitab is hidden, due to the limited functionality of
the feature, but it can be made active via an option on the More options (see page
34) menu. Once activated, the Stretch Contrast minitab can be selected. Most users
will find the Histogram adjustment much more flexible for their requirements.

It is now possible, when necessary, to make manual adjustments to the white

and black levels and gamma (50% gray level).
80 User Guide V21.3 Software

1. Use the sliders on the left of the screen to make the desired changes.

The green line on the display is the histogram showing the different gray scales
of the image at the time the stretch contrast button was pressed.
2. Use the three sliders as follows.
 Top slider - adjusts the white level to enhance darker tones and lose light
detail.
 Bottom slider - adjusts the black level to enhance lighter tones and lose dark
detail.
 Middle slider - adjusts the 50% gray level (gamma) to enhance lighter or
darker tones without losing detail.
3. Pressing the Restore button will reset the sliders to their original values.
4. Click the Stretch Contrast button again to revert back to the unprocessed image.
Once the Stretch Contrast levels have been set, they do not change until either the
Restore button is pressed or the Stretch Contrast is turned off and reapplied.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 81

8.5.4. Inverting the image

It is sometimes useful to view the X-ray image inverted, i.e. blacks as whites and
whites as blacks.
1. Click the Invert Image button.

2. Pressing the Invert Image button again will set the image back to normal.
This can be used in combination with Stretch Contrast and/or Image Enhancement
Filters

Normal Image Inverted Image

8.5.5. Coloring the image

It is sometimes helpful to use color to search for defects. The human eye is not that
sensitive to resolving changes in gray level. It is much better seeing changes in
color. Using the color filter can highlight the presence of voiding, for example.
The machine can convert the black and white image to a false color image.
1. Click the Color the image button.

2. Use stretch contrast to change the gray level and hence the color
representation.
3. Click the Color the image button a second time to turn the effect off.
82 User Guide V21.3 Software

This can be used in combination with Stretch Contrast and/or Image Enhancement
filters.

Normal Image Colored Image

8.5.6. Creating 3-D images

The software can convert an image into a 3-D contour drawing with color.
The height and added color of the part depends on the amount of X-rays absorbed.
1. Click the Create a 3-D image button.

2. Click the Create a 3-D image button a second time to turn off this effect.
Whilst the 3D image button is active, all other filter options are disabled.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 83

8.5.7. Quad Screen

It is possible to divide the seen image viewer into four quadrants in order to capture
and view four different images at the same time.
These four images are not Live Images.

To activate the Quad Screen view select the Quad Screen button
This will divide the screen into four equal parts, with each quadrant outlined in a
different color. The quadrant outlined in red will be the current active image and the
location will be shown on the Scanmap if one has been created.
84 User Guide V21.3 Software

To switch to another quadrant simply use the left mouse button and double click the
quadrant to be made active. The outline of the selected quadrant will then turn red
and will be the active image. The image seen in this quadrant can then be moved
and manipulated in the same way as a single image independently of any image
displayed in the other three quadrants.

As an image is shown in each quadrant and subsequently moved to a new location

on the Scanmap, a corresponding rectangle is shown in the same color as the
quadrant on the Scanmap to give the location for operators.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 85

The images shown in each quadrant are saved images and if a quadrant containing
an existing image is reselected this will be updated with the current location and the
image displayed will be changed to the current device under inspection.
The system will not automatically move the sample to the existing displayed position.
It is possible to add Callouts (see page 99) and Annotations (see page 101) to the
display when in Quad Screen mode, but any callouts or annotations must be added
to the active quadrant before selecting a new quadrant.
To return to the single image display just press the Quad Screen Button again

and the current active window will become the main displayed image.

8.5.8. Adding image filtering and enhancements

8.5.8.1. Introduction
This section is intended for Engineers. However, Operators may find it useful in
gaining an understanding of how the image filters work.
Single filters
A single, or individual, filter is a single filter kernel which is applied to an image to
produce a different image of the same size.

Input image Filter Output image

Filter pipelines
A filter pipeline is a linear chain of such individual filters in a fixed order, i.e. the
result-image of the first filter execution is piped into the second filter of the pipeline,
producing the second result image, which is then filtered by the third filter and so on.

Input F1 F2 Fn Output
image image
Since the results of any filter pipeline is again just an image of the same size as the
input image, filter pipelines are also referred to as filters throughout the X-ray
application. This naming convention makes it easier for users who then simply have
to deal with filters.
All filter pipelines that are created on the advanced-tab card by an Engineer are
stored in FiltersAndMethods.xml.
86 User Guide V21.3 Software

8.5.8.2. Understanding Filters

Overview
Note: This topic is intended to give Engineers an understanding of filter creation.
Some understanding of XML is assumed.
The file FiltersAndMethods.xml itself is written in XML V1.0 standard format and is
made up of three parts:
 A commenting section, briefly describing the filter and pipeline definition
 A filter-kernel section, where single filter kernels are defined
 The pipeline section, where filter pipelines are defined as filter chains
A knowledgeable user can alter the settings in this file manually and make new filter
kernels or pipelines available in the program.
All definitions must be placed inside the tag-pair:
<FiltersAndMethods> and </FiltersAndMethods>.

The filter kernel

A filter kernel is the typical mathematical notion for defining an enhancement filter
operator. Enhancement filters operate from an input image, calculating an output
image pixel-by-pixel.
Each resulting pixel PR in the output image is calculated from the corresponding
pixel on the input image AND some surrounding pixels.
In this example, only the pixels immediately surrounding the pixel of interest are
considered.

Input image Output image

There are many ways of image enhancing. However the most common, and the
type used on the Nordson DAGE machine, is to weight each pixel in the input image
such that:
PR = (P0·W0 + P1·W1 + P2·W2+ P3·W3+ P4·W4+ P5·W5+ P6·W6+
P7·W7+ P8·W8) / N
This means that N=9 weighting terms (W0 to W8) need to be defined. It is usual to
show these as a matrix, which from this point will be referred to as filter kernel.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 87

Defining filters
Filter Kernels are part of the filter definition. All filter definitions must be placed
inside the tags <Filter> and </Filter>.
The following XML sample shows how to define a filter kernel in
FiltersAndMethods.xml:

Individual filter kernels are defined inside the tag pair <Kernel> and </Kernel>. The
kernel weights are defined row by row. Currently, only square sized filter kernels are
supported, which means that the size of the kernel row and column per kernel must
be equal, e.g. 3x3, 5x5, 7x7, etc. One row is defined as space separated list of
integer values inside the tag pair <row> and </row>.
All filters must have an individual name, defined by the Name attribute. A filter can
have a Category attribute, defining the class of the filter, e.g. Edge for edge-defining
filters, etc. If the category is omitted, the filter will be inserted into the Other category
by default.
Filters can have different kernels which differ by their kernel type. The Type
attribute(s) must define consecutive integer values, beginning with 1. Each new
kernel type defines a completely new filter operator which is accessible through the
filter name. The kernel size may vary from type to type, e.g. allowing 3x3, 7x7, etc.
sized kernels defined for one filter.
Depending on the filter a Strength slider is provided to vary the effect. A value of
zero (0) turns the filter off.

Single Filters
The X-ray application will automatically create a single filter-pipeline for every
defined kernel.
These single filters cannot be changed from within the program. They can, however,
be used as filters by the user in the normal way.
Each of these user defined single filters has strength settings which are defined in
the Image Enhancement mini-tab. It is also important to note that some of the built-in
filters have different kernel types.
88 User Guide V21.3 Software

Built-in filters
Apart from the user defined filters, the X-ray application has a number of built-in
filters, which do not show up in the filter definition section of FiltersAndMethods.xml.
These built-in filters cannot be changed or overwritten. They are, however, listed in
the pipeline definitions section in the default version of FiltersAndMethods.xml. If one
of the built-in filter pipelines is deleted, the filter can no longer be used.

The Pipeline section

Filter pipelines are historically named Methods in the FiltersAndMethods.xml file.
Therefore, if the Engineer wishes to define a new pipeline, it must be done inside a
<Method> and </Method> tag pair. The following is an example covering all aspects of
the pipelines:

All filter pipelines must be given an individual name in the name attribute. An
additional permit attribute shows or removes the pipeline from the basic user Image
Enhancement mini-tab; its values can be true or false.
A pipeline executes each of its single filters one by one in the same order as they
are written down in FiltersAndMethods.xml from top-to-bottom. One filter within a
pipeline is always defined inside a short <Filter> and </> tag pair (see example). A
filter must have a name set by the name attribute and this name must be either that
of a built-in filter or that of a filter defined in the filters-section of
FiltersAndMethods.xml. This filter can be differentiated further by a kernel type, the
type attribute, and, where applicable, have its strength set by the strength attribute;
0 to 100 in integer steps.
Note: Filters can only ever be used when they are defined in the pipeline section of
FiltersAndMethods.xml.

8.5.8.3. Creating a filter pipeline

Note: Filter pipelines can only be created in Engineer access.
Create a new filter pipeline as follows.
1. Select the Image Enhancement mini-tab.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 89

2. Click on the Advanced button.

3. Click on the Create a new pipeline button.

A blank box will be displayed at the end of the list.

4. Insert a suitable name for the new pipeline by typing directly into the box.

5. Select the filter from the list in the Operators box that you wish to be part of the
new pipeline.

6. Click on the Add filter to pipeline button.

7. Continue to add filters to the pipeline as required.

The sequence filters are added to the new pipeline is the sequence in which
they will be applied to the image. There is a limit of 100 filters per pipeline.
The sequence can be changed by using the two arrows to the side of the filter
list.

The filters are applied in the order they are set. The final effect seen may be
different if filter A is followed by filter B compared to filter B followed by filter A.
8. Click on the filter you wish to move in the pipeline and then click on the arrow to
move it in the desired direction.
90 User Guide V21.3 Software

9. Filters can be removed from the pipeline at any time by clicking on the filter in
your new pipeline and then click on the Remove filter from pipeline button.

10. Any filter pipeline that has been created since the software was installed can be
deleted from the filter-pipeline bank by clicking on the filter and then on the
Delete pipeline button.

11. Use the Back To Initial Screen button to return to the filter selection screen.

8.5.8.4. Setting filter availability

Note: The filters can only be made available in Engineer access.
Set the filter availability as follows.
1. Click on the Image Enhancement mini-tab.
2. Click on the Advanced button
3. Click on the blue tick to de-select a filter. Click on the empty box to
re-select.
Only ticked filters will be available for use.
A filter can consist of one filtering action or can be put together with others to
form a single filter in order to apply several different effects in one action. Filters
assembled in this way are termed filter pipelines.
4. Click on the + sign, to the left of the tick, to display the contents of the filter
pipeline.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 91

8.5.8.5. Selecting filters for use

Types of filter
There are fifty different filters available to the operator when the X-ray software is
first installed. The filters are arranged in five groups:
 Contrast
 Edge
 Noise
 Sharpen
 Other
Contrast
These five filters affect the differences between light and dark areas of the image.
Edge
Use these twenty-five filters to improve the edge definition in various ways.
Noise
These ten filters are used to reduce signal noise within the camera generated
image.
Sharpen
These two filters sharpen the entire image rather than just the edges.
Other
This group of eight filters provides various effects, such as embossing, which are
used to improve the readability of the image.

Selecting a filter
Individual filters are selected as follows.
1. Click on the Image Enhancement mini-tab.

2. Click on the drop down arrow and select the desired filter.
92 User Guide V21.3 Software

Use the slider, where present, to adjust the effect.

Fully left, or zero (0) turns the effect off.
Fully right, or maximum (100), sets the effect to maximum.
Note: Not all filters have sliders; some may have more than one.
3. Select a suitable image and select the Enhance Image button.

4. Whilst the selected filter is being applied the button LED will be shown yellow.

5. Once the selected filter has been fully applied the button LED will turn green.

Pressing the Enhance Image button again will turn off the enhancement.
Emboss
Emboss
The emboss filters operate in a different manner to create a relief map of the
intensity changes.
They are useful when looking for subtle changes in intensity in BGA balls or voiding.
Their use is generally one of operator preference.

Note: This enhancement will change with the intensity level. Always reset any
applied Stretch Contrast when using an emboss filter.

8.6. Image recipes

Machine settings be saved as a machine recipe for convenient recall by less skilled
operators.
The five recipe buttons and the drop-down list are accessed by right clicking on the
screen image area.

A number or recipes are supplied on installation that may or may not be suitable for
inspecting your particular products. However, this list can be changed at will and
more suitable settings established.
The General Viewing button cannot have any additional recipes ascribed to it. Any
recipe on the list can be assigned to one of the other four buttons for convenience
by the operator.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 93

8.6.1. General viewing recipe

A special recipe called General Viewing sets the machine so that a wide variety of
samples can be seen. It is generally used to allow the operator to see something
quickly, e.g. before making a navigation map or using the Image Wizard.
If these settings in this recipe are unsuitable for your application, then they can be
adjusted as follows.
1. Change the voltage and power settings to more suitable values, but leave the
image averaging to 32 with all other image processing tools to off.
2. Select the Images>Update General Viewing Recipe menu option to save these
changes.

The Recipe buttons can only be altered with Engineer access rights.

8.6.2. Selecting an image recipe

You can either make a selection from the list using the mouse

Or choose one of the four buttons assigned to a configuration.

Note: Recipe changes may take up to 5 seconds to establish.

8.6.3. Saving a recipe

Current settings are saved by simply typing a new name into the recipe name box
and pressing enter.
94 User Guide V21.3 Software

8.6.4. Assigning a recipe to a button

If required, a recipe can be assigned to one of the four recipe buttons as follows.
1. Select the required recipe from the list.

2. Point to the button to be assigned and click the right mouse button.

A simple menu appears that allows you to assign the currently selected recipe
to this button or to clear the current assignment.
3. In this case, select Assign....., and this recipe name will now appear on the
button.

8.6.5. Updating a recipe

It is possible to update the selected recipe with revised settings by selecting the
Menu>Images>Update the recipe... menu option.

The actual text for this option from the Images menu varies depending on actions
prior to the selection.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 95

8.6.6. Deleting a recipe

1. Select the recipe to be deleted from the list.

2. Press the delete key on the keyboard.

The machine will ask you to confirm the deletion.
3. Select Yes to complete the deletion.

8.7. Live Image Processing

Live Image processing allows for real time enhancement of the image without the
need to use frame averaging to reduce the inherent background noise and allows for
quicker inspection times.
This feature is not available on all machine models. Contact your local
NordsonDAGE representative for more information.

8.7.1. Live Image Filters

A list of the filters available can be viewed from the Image Enhancement minitab and
selecting the drop down list in the 'Live Filtering' section. Some filters work better than
others and will depend on the sample being inspected.
96 User Guide V21.3 Software

This same list is displayed at the top of the Image Processing minitab

and on the Right Hand Panel if it has been activated. The filter will be applied in the
same way regardless of which method is chosen to select it.
Live Image Filters can be made active or turned off by selecting or deselecting the
checkbox beneath the listbox.

Pipelines cannot be created for Live Filters.

It is possible to have a Live Image enhancement active and an Averaged Image enhancement applied to the same image. These will have a cumulative effect on
the displayed image, which may not provide the best final result.

8.7.2. Stretch Contrast Filters

All of the filters listed in the Live Filtering list are edge enhancing filters but there are
also three Stretch Contrast filters which can be selected from a separate list:
 User Guide V21.3 Software 97

 Linear - This will apply a standard stretch contrast using the minimum and
maximum gray levels in the image.
 Dark - This applies a stretch contrast using the minimum and maximum gray
levels in the image but emphasizes the dark areas. This can lose some of the
detail in the lighter areas of the image.
 Maximum - This automatically tries to brighten the darker regions whilst
maintaining the detail of the lighter areas of the image.
All three live contrast stretch filters are dynamic and will modify the on-screen image
contrast automatically as changes in the main x-ray image occur, either through a
user modification of the tube settings or as the sample is moved.
Only one live contrast stretch filter can be selected at a time.
It is possible to have a Live Stretch Contrast active and an Averaged stretch applied to the same image. These will have a cumulative effect on the displayed
image, which may not provide the best final result.

These filters are also displayed on the Image Processing minitab

and on the Right Hand panel if it has been activated.

The filters can be switched on by selecting the check box beneath the list box.

By hovering the cursor over the check box a tooltip description will be displayed for
a few seconds.

8.7.3. Live Image Smoothing

Live Image Smoothing allows a Live image to appear as if it is averaged without the
need to wait for the image to complete a frame average before any processing can
be applied.
Live Image Smoothing can be enabled from the Options screen.
98 User Guide V21.3 Software

A droplist gives a choice of either on or off and a slider allows the user to select the
amount of image smoothing to be applied.
The ability to turn Live Image Smoothing On or Off is also available on the Right
Hand Panel if it has been activated.

In some cases, especially where the inspected samples are being moved on the
screen quickly, it is suggested the amount of image smoothing used is reduced.
 99

9. Adding notes and saving images

9.1. Marking the image
When a fault has been discovered on a part it is useful to mark the problem with a
note, and then print or save it to disk. Up to nine problems can be separately
marked using specific callouts. It is also possible to highlight areas of interest using
the 'Annotation' tool. (see page 101)
Using Callouts to mark problems.
1. Select the Callouts mini-tab.

Three boxes are now visible down the left hand side of the screen. However up
to nine can be accessed using the scroll bar to the left.
2. Mark a fault by dragging and dropping the pin button onto the area of interest on
the image.

The fault now has a pointer on it as shown below.

100 User Guide V21.3 Software

The pointer number 1 corresponds to Callout 1, and therefore any comment

added for Callout 1 is referenced to this arrow.

It is possible to configure the software to record the comments in a particular

style. Refer to Configuring Fonts (see page 101).
3. Arrows can be deleted by clicking once on the Pin button.

4. Choose the direction of the arrow by selecting one of the direction buttons.
Direction buttons

Arrow on fault

Note: The arrow will change as the button is clicked.

Both the color and text size or font can be configured for user preference (see page
101). Refer to the 'More Options' menu (see page 34).
 User Guide V21.3 Software 101

9.1.1. Configuring fonts

The respective font styles can be set from the overlay, callout and print sections
within the 'More Options' menu (see page 34).

Pressing will open a new dialog window.

This will allow the user to set the Font styles to suit.

9.1.2. Annotations
The Annotation Tools menu will be displayed automatically as a floating tool bar
when the Callouts minitab is selected.
102 User Guide V21.3 Software

It can also be selected by choosing 'Annotation Tools' from the right mouse button
context menu.

The menu will appear, by default, in a compact form but can be expanded by double
clicking the menu bar.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 103

There are three main drawing options to choose as a text box and a pointer. The
text box can be either a rectangle, round cornered rectangle or an ellipse. For each
shape, holding the 'shift' key while drawing will produce either a square, round
cornered square or circle. Holding the 'Ctrl' key while drawing centers rectangles or
an ellipse around the start point. Holding both the 'Shift' and 'Ctrl' keys whilst
drawing centers squares or a circle around the start point.
To draw the shape, select the required tool and using the left mouse button click and
drag an outline to the dimensions required.

Release the left mouse button to set the shape. Once the text box shape has been
defined it will appear as defined by the options selected in the 'More Options' menu.
(see page 34)
104 User Guide V21.3 Software

The appearance can also be altered via the expanded Annotation Tools menu.

To add text in the box, double click within the text box and type the required text.
The font style and size can be set in the 'More Options' menu. (see page 34)
 User Guide V21.3 Software 105

The text can also be altered via the expanded Annotation Tools menu.
106 User Guide V21.3 Software

To resize a text box after the text has been entered ensure the 'Annotation Tools'
menu is visible and select the box to be resized. The grab handles around the edge
of the text box can then be used to drag the box to the required size. The text will
automatically be wrapped to fit the box as required. While a text box is highlighted it
is possible to delete it by pressing the 'Delete' key on the keyboard.
It is also possible to add pointers from key areas on the image to the relevant text
box. This is done by selecting the pointer option from the Annotation tool menu,

, then using the left mouse button to click from the point of interest to the
relevant text box.

Releasing the left mouse button will set the pointer and attach it to the text box with
the head anchored to the point of interest. The style of the pointer can be set in the
'More Options' menu. (see page 34)
 User Guide V21.3 Software 107

The pointer style can also be altered via the expanded Annotation Tools menu.

All annotations can be removed by pressing 'Shift' and 'Delete' on the keyboard and
accepting the confirmation question.
108 User Guide V21.3 Software

9.2. Printing the image

Note: Printing is sent to the default printer. See your line engineer for details.
1. Click the Print the image button.

The print the image button allows a title and number of copies to be entered.
2. Click the Print button to send the image, with title and number of copies, to the
printer.

If the printed image is black then ensure 'Compatible Printing' is enabled by

selecting the checkbox on the Options screen.

9.3. Saving the image

There are two options available for the user:
 Save the X-ray image only
 Save the image and callouts
Either of these is done as follows.
1. Click the either the Save the X-ray image (1) or Save image and callouts (2) button.

The Save As screen will be displayed.

2. Select the desired destination location and the desired format.
If the Save the X-ray image (1) is selected then the image file can be saved in
one of the following formats:
 JPEG .jpg
 Bitmap .bmp
 Comma & Separated Values .csv (either the whole image or just the center
area for calibration purposes.).
 8 bit .tif
 16 bit .tiff
 16 bit .raw
If the Save image and callouts (2) is used, the image will be saved in .jpg format.
3. Give the file a name in the normal way and select Save.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 109

Setting the Save Image defaults.

The default settings for saving images can be set from the More Options menu (see
page 34).
For JPEG format, the quality of the image can also be set as can the option to
include any overlays with the saved image.

The defaults set here will also be applied to images saved as part of any Automatic
Inspection Routine or Automatic Measurement.

9.4. Marking failures on the navigation map

It is possible to mark the position of failure points on the navigation map; the map
can then be printed out or saved for use at a rework station.
There are six functions associated with marking the navigation map and these are
accessed using the buttons that have been added to the board image tab.

Additional settings for the size of the navigation map and on-the-fly navigation map
generation can be made.
110 User Guide V21.3 Software

9.4.1. Adding a marker

1. Click the button to add a marker to the navigation map at the center of the
current view of the image.

This will effectively add a red spot with a unique ID number at the center of the
rectangle that illustrates the current field of view of the system. There is no limit
on the number of markers that can be added to a single map.

9.4.2. Clearing markers

1. Click this button to clear most recently added marker from the navigation map.

2. Press and hold the shift key and click this button to clear all markers.

9.4.3. Saving the navigation map with markers

1. Click on the Save map with markers button.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 111

2. Give the map a name and click Save.

9.4.4. Printing the navigation map with markers

1. Click the Print button to display the print window.

2. Enter a title before printing, if this is required.

112 User Guide V21.3 Software

9.4.5. Exporting defect locations in CSV format

1. Click on the Export defect locations button

This button will only become available for selection once a marker has been
placed.
2. Browse to the location the file is to be saved, enter a filename and click Save.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 113

3. The saved CSV file will give the marker number and the X,Y co-ordinates
relative to 0,0 on the sample tray, which is the front left corner of the sample tray
or bottom left corner as seen on the screen.

9.4.6. Save the current map

1. Click on the Save current map button.

2. Give the map a name and click Save.

114 User Guide V21.3 Software

All ScanMaps will be saved in .tif format

9.4.7. Loading a previously saved map

1. Click on the Load a previously saved map button.

2. Select the required map and click Open.

 115

10. Measuring ball grid arrays (BGA) manually

The Ball Grid Array (BGA) tool measures the diameter (the longest axis if not
perfectly circular), the area, and roundness of each BGA ball. It can also be used to
measure total percentage voiding and single largest void inside each BGA ball. The
image intensifier should be set to view from straight above the part. Click on the
center of the dartboard to do this.

There are two steps to analyzing BGAs.

 Identify the ball outline and therefore measure size and shape.
 Identify the voiding inside the ball and therefore measure the largest and total
void.
The identification of these shapes is made by analyzing the intensity of X-rays in the
image, and deciding, for example, the difference in intensity between a ball and a
void.
Once this decision is made, then the analysis can take place.
The machine software can make these decisions itself, but manual adjustment is
available for difficult cases.

10.1. Getting ready

10.1.1. Locating the part
1. Move the part into the viewing area.
2. Use one of the recipes such as General Viewing, if you are unsure which settings
to use.
3. Try and locate a few balls that have voiding or some feature of interest.

10.1.2. Recipe settings

1. Set the tube voltage and power using one of the following methods:
 An existing recipe (see page 93).
 Manual adjustment (see page 66).
It is important that the imaging device is not saturated with too much X-ray
intensity as this can cause the size of the BGA ball to appear smaller.
Note: X-ray intensity, and therefore saturation, can be caused by tube voltage
too high, tube power too high, or a combination of the two. Manual adjustment
of both these settings is possible (see page 66).
2. Ensure that with Contrast Stretching off, that the area around the balls is not
saturated, i.e. not completely white.
116 User Guide V21.3 Software

It is quite acceptable from then on to use the Contrast Stretching and any other
enhancement to improve the visibility of voids as the measurements are always
taken from the unprocessed image.

10.1.3. Setting the picture

1. Set the view to overhead and zoom to the required magnification

The magnification of the ball depends the distance between the part and the
X-ray tube.
Therefore similar-sized solder balls placed closer to the x-ray tube will appear
larger in the image compared with those placed further away, such as on the
second side of a board.
2. Limit the number of visible balls to around a maximum of 50, or less, for best
results.
If the balls are small on the screen then they will have fewer pixels describing
them resulting in poorer accuracy of any measurement.

10.1.4. Setting the height

Setting the height for the BGA to be measured is very important (see page 60). If the
height is not set then the on-screen measurements in terms of microns per pixel
may be incorrect as the height of the BGA within the sample has not been
determined or confirmed
1. Click on the Set Height button.

2. Choose a ball that is clearly visible and use the center of the BGA ball as a
reference point.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 117

3. Zoom in if necessary to improve accuracy.

4. Continue to select the same point on the same BGA ball as the system
requests.

10.2. Measuring the ball outlines

Before any measurement can be made, the outline of each ball on-screen must be
defined according to a grayscale threshold level. Once achieved, the software can
then be used to measure:
 Ball diameter
 Ball roundness
 Ball area
 Some, or all, of the above measurements at the same time.
Measurement is started as follows.
1. Select Ball and Die Void Measurement.

2. Select Outline Measurements.

Note: Only wholly complete balls within the full image will be measured. If a ball
is truncated by the edge of the image, the software will automatically exclude it
from any measurement. Depending on the GUI layout selected by the user (see
page 29), a truncated ball on-screen may still be measured as it is complete in
the full (savable) image.
118 User Guide V21.3 Software

10.2.1. Finding the ball outline

The Include sizes slider will remove from the analysis any objects in the image found
below the set size given at the right-hand end of the slider.
1. Select 'Manual' from the drop down list to enable the manual controls for
threshold setting as follows, otherwise continue to step 2 below.

The manual slider, to the left of the drop down list, allows the user to set any
X-ray intensity level as appropriate to define the outline of the balls.
When moved from the minimum setting, the Threshold Level changes to display
the numerical value set by the slider.
If the Auto button is pressed then the slider is moved to the best guess position
as a starting point.

As the slider is moved, the results are seen in real time on-screen as a change
in the definition of the perimeter around each ball by a colored outline.
Note: The tool tip on the Auto button reads Make best guess at threshold.
2. Set the 'Include sizes' slider to a number less than the smallest ball size
expected.
This will ensure that smaller features are not included in the analysis.

3. Alternatively, smaller and larger features than those of the solder balls to be
measured can be excluded as being outside of a user defined range as follows.
 Set the lower limit as described in step 2.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 119

 Set an upper limit by pressing and holding the SHIFT key and then dragging
the slider to set the desired upper limit. A pair of concentric red rings will
appear in the center of the Image to aid with the setting of these limits.

4. The machine can analyze the image and determine a valid X-ray intensity that
represents the outline of the ball. This is achieved by using an automatic
threshold detection technique.
There are several options available, from the drop down list, which can be
selected to achieve slightly different threshold detection for the objects
displayed on the screen.

The option selected will dynamically change the displayed outline, so the the
best choice can be made for the image displayed.
The list in the image above is shown complete. If options are not displayed, they
may have been disabled in the More Options menu (see page 34).
5. Click Find Outline.
Each of the balls should now have a colored outline defining it correctly. Any
balls that are missing a colored outline mean they do not meet criteria set by the
user. This could be because the ball size or grayscale intensity are outside the
user-defined settings.
120 User Guide V21.3 Software

Marking the balls

The balls can be marked with:
 Circles
 Centers
Marking the ball outline as a circle
The software can convert the area defined by the ball perimeter into a circle of
equivalent area located about the found center of the ball.
Mark the ball outline as follows.
 Select the Circles option.

This can be useful in determining visually how out-of-round the balls are.
Marking the ball center
Show the ball centers as follows.
 Select the Centers option. This will show the center of each ball based on the
location of the intersection of the long and short axis of each ball.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 121

10.2.2. Measuring the ball diameter

1. Turn on the diameter measurement by checking Diameters.

If pass/fail limits are needed, then set these as a lower and upper limit.
The diameter measurement will be indicated in green if inside or red if outside
the limits set.

Note: If the Low and High limits are both set to 0.0, then the measurements will be
made on-screen without highlighting any pass or fails.

10.2.3. Measuring the ball roundness

1. Turn on the roundness measurement by checking Roundness.

As it is normal to look for a poor roundness figure, only a lower limit is available.
122 User Guide V21.3 Software

The roundness measurement is indicated in green if above or red if below the

limit set.

Note: If the Low limit is set to 0.0, then the measurement will be made on-screen
without highlighting any pass or fails.

10.2.4. Measuring the ball area

1. Turn on the area measurement by checking Area.

If pass/fail limits are needed, then set these as a lower and upper limit.
The area measurement will be indicated in green if above or red if below the
limits set.

Note: If the Low and High limits are both set to 0.0, then the measurements will be
made on-screen without highlighting any pass or fails.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 123

10.2.5. Multiple measurements

All of the aforementioned measurements can be performed simultaneously, but the
display may be a little confusing.
1. Select all three options.

2. The displayed font size, and what is shown on the screen, can be adjusted by
the user through the options in 'More Options' (see page 34).
Saved images will be as shown on the screen.
124 User Guide V21.3 Software

10.3. Measuring the ball voiding

The void measurement tool is designed to work for BGAs as well as for other
measurements, such as die attach voiding. The void measurement works by looking
for all pixels within the defined ball area that are lighter than a set grayscale value.
This void percentage is an area measurement calculated as the total number of
these lighter pixels as a percentage to all of the pixels in the defined ball area.
Some of the additional features and options available in this section are less
relevant to ball void measurements and of more value for area void measurements,
but may still be useful in difficult situations.
Ball voiding, i.e. flux or air pockets in the ball, are usually very distinctive because of
their lower density compared to the solder material. Some examples are shown
below.

Other circular features can also exist inside the balls depending on the process.
These are often extremely faint (1) and can be taken as voiding.

There are two techniques available to the user for detecting voids. These are
Threshold detection (see page 124), which incorporates simple gray scale threshold
measurements to identify the void, or Blob Detector (see page 128) method, which
uses a more accurate means of detection designed for devices with a low gray level
variance.

10.3.1. Threshold detection

10.3.1.1. Standard automatic method
1. Complete finding the ball outline (see page 118).
 User Guide V21.3 Software 125

2. Select Ball Void Measurement.

3. Select Void measurements

4. Ensure Threshold is selected with Auto chosen from the drop down list.

Refer to "Advanced tools (see page 154)" for further description of all the
options in the drop down list.
5. Set the Edge exclude slider to 15%.
The edge of the ball is usually significantly lighter in grayscale (density) than the
center, due to the solder ball being thinner at the edges compared to the center,
when imaged from the top down. Therefore, if a certain amount of the edge of
the ball is not excluded from the analysis then this lower density edge region,
because it has a similar grayscale value to true voids in the central portion of the
ball, will be included incorrectly in the total void percentage value for that ball.
Setting the edge exclude slider to 15% (typically, otherwise use in the range 10 -
20%) will exclude this low density region from being included in the voiding
calculation. The results of adjusting the slider are shown in their effects on the
voiding calculation in real time.
Although the void measurement area is being reduced with this slider, the final
void percentage is calculated as a function of the whole ball area. Furthermore,
if a true void is located within this exclusion region then it will not be calculated
into the total and therefore an error bar in the void measurement data must be
understood.

6. Check that the Largest Voids slider is set to maximum and the Min Void slider is
set to minimum.
126 User Guide V21.3 Software

7. Check the Limits option and set a value in the applicable box.

It is normal for BGAs to measure the overall voiding percentage. Although it is

possible to fail based on the largest individual, Ind, void found.
Note: If the Limits are set to 0.0, then the measurements will be made on-screen
without highlighting any pass or fails.

8. Press the Voids button.

A typical result is shown below.

The largest Individual Void for each BGA ball will be shown in parenthesis. If
this largest individual void is greater than the set limit then it will be indicated in
Red.
Note: Measurement limits should be set to tighter values than may be required
for production standards to take into account edge exclusion and void size
variation caused by magnification differences depending on the position of the
void within the ball.
If the void percentage is not displayed, ensure the checkbox labeled "show void
statistics" on the User Drawn Void Measurements minitab is selected.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 127

10.3.1.2. Manual method

If the voids are not outlined correctly, then a manual adjustment of the void outlines
is possible by selecting Manual from the drop down list.

A manual slider appears which allows the user to set an X-ray intensity level as
appropriate to define the outline of the voids.

If the Auto button is pressed, then the slider is moved to the best guess position as a
starting point.

10.3.1.3. Adaptive method

Selecting the Adaptive method from the drop down list does not use a single level of
grayscale intensity to define the void.
Instead, the grayscale level chosen to define the voids changes across the analysis
area. This is because the software looks at the average grayscale in the immediate
vicinity of each pixel. This method is more often used when analyzing large voiding
areas, such as under die-attach, where the density background across the
measurement is more variable, for example due to noticeable variation in material
thickness. This method may be used for BGA analysis.
Advanced tools (see page 154) has further information on the use of this method.
128 User Guide V21.3 Software

Pressing the Auto button allows the software to determine a 'best guess' starting
position.

10.3.2. Blob Detector

10.3.2.1. Measuring voids by means of blob detection
The blob detector provides a better method for computing void percentage
compared to threshold-based methods (see page 124), when high density materials
(low contrast images) must be analyzed, and both foreground and background
absorptions are varying. These conditions make the identification of voids very
challenging unless the void detector could process intensity information as well as
local contrast information.
Blob detection offers this capability.
Voids measurement by means of blob detection is performed as follows.
1. Select a voltage and power combination, along with any image enhancement
and frame average to obtain the clearest possible image of the voids.
2. Define the area(s) of interest using the drawing tools.
3. Select Void Measurements mini-tab.
4. Select Blob Detector method
5. Select one of the two available options, Thin Solder or Thick Solder. Choose Thin
Solder option for void measurements in Solder paste under components and
heat sinks. Choose Thick Solder option for BGA balls analysis and Pads analysis.

6. Refer either to section Thin Solder (see page 130) option or Thick Solder (see
page 133) option for guidance on how to set up the controls of the methodology
selected.
7. Set the Limits for All voiding and an individual, Ind, void, if required.
8. Turn on the Limit % display, if required.
9. Click the Voids button.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 129

Typical results of void percentage computation in thick and thin solder paste
components respectively are shown below.
Note: The measurements were made on-screen without highlighting any pass or fails
by setting Limits to 0.0

Figure 1 Thick solder paste analysis ( BGA ball analysis )

Figure 2 Thin solder paste analysis

130 User Guide V21.3 Software

10.3.2.2. Thin Solder option

The technique provides an efficient solution for void percentage calculation in high
density materials (low contrast image analysis).
Each point or pixel on the picture is analyzed to determine if it is part of a void or
not.
As part of this analysis, information about the local intensity contrast of each voiding
region is extracted and used to provide a very accurate identification of individual
voids.
There are a number of controls associated with this method. The following sections
will explain and illustrate the effects of the controls.

It is recommended that the 'Best Guess' button is pressed to establish some base
settings prior to fine adjustment.

Max Void adjustment slider

 User Guide V21.3 Software 131

The Max Void adjustment slider determines how big a region of bright connected
pixels (void) can be relative to the size of the region which is analyzed.
Set the Max Void slider to 5%, if the largest void is expected to be less than or equal
to 5% of the area which is under analysis.
In general, with the Max Void slider set to the default value 5%, an accurate detection
of each void region on the image will be achieved. However, a bigger Max Void value
should be used if the blob detector returns a void outline which is smaller than the
true void contour, i.e. some parts of a void region have not been included, see
Figure 3.

Figure 3 Max Void adjustment over void detection accuracy: (a) some parts of a void
region are not detected because the size of the largest void expected was
under-estimated, (Max Void = 5%); (b) The increment of the max void value allows a
more accurate void identification, (Max Void > 5%).
Figure 3 shows that accurate void detection can be achieved by setting the Max Void
slider to a value that is greater than 5%. However, with max void value set too high,
some faint features (Figure 4.b) may be included. These features are false voids
and could generate a less accurate void measurement.
It is advisable to set the max void slider to a value as close as possible to the
minimum value (3%) in order to achieve a more accurate void measurement.
132 User Guide V21.3 Software

Figure 4 Max Void adjustment over false detection: (a) Void measurement returned
by the blob detector when setting the value of max void in the range [3% - 12%]; (b)
Void identification achieved with max void set to a value greater than 12%. Faint
features are included in the void measurement.
Contrast Multiplier adjustment slider

The Contrast Multiplier adjustment slider determines how the blob detector uses
intensity contrast information to classify a point on the picture as part of a void or
not.
The adjustment of the Contrast Multiplier slider is particularly useful when foreground
absorption is varying, i.e. local contrast between the void and its surrounding area
varies across the region to be analyzed.
In general, with the Contrast Multiplier slider set to less than or equal to 25, the blob
detector provides a good void identification. However, higher values should be used
to include more low contrast voids in the void percentage computation. As for "max
void", setting contrast multiplier too high will allow detection of faint features. Typical
results of void percentage computation obtained with contrast multiplier set to values
10, 25, and 75, are shown below.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 133

View Indicators

 Edge exclude
This is used to remove a specific area around the perimeter of the shape from the
analysis and is expressed as a percentage of the selected size. The results of
adjusting the slider are shown in their effects on the voiding calculation in real time.

10.3.2.3. Thick Solder option

The technique provides an efficient solution for the identification of individual voids
in thick solder paste components, e.g. BGA ball analysis.
Each point or pixel on the picture is analyzed to determine if it is part of a void or
not.
As part of this analysis, information about the intensity contrast and the
pseudo-elliptic shape of each voiding region is used to provide a very accurate void
percentage calculation.
134 User Guide V21.3 Software

There are a number of controls associated with this method. The following sections
will explain and illustrate the effects of the controls.

Pressing the 'Make Best Guess at Threshold' button will help to establish a good
starting point prior to any fine adjustment.

Min Void adjustment slider

 User Guide V21.3 Software 135

The Min Void adjustment slider determines how small a region of bright connected
pixels (void) can be relative to the size of the region which is analyzed. This control
is very useful when dealing with void percentage computation in BGA analysis and
allows the user to remove voids below a certain size from the analysis.
As these voids individually are a very small percentage of the area, this control is
limited to 2.5% of the area.
It is advisable to set the Min Void slider to 0, if the area under analysis is not a solder
ball.
Max Void adjustment slider
136 User Guide V21.3 Software

Please, refer to section in Thin Solder Option (see page 130) for a description of the
Max Void control.
In general, with the max void slider set greater than or equal to 10%, the blob
detector returns an accurate detection of each void region on the image. However,
higher values should be used if the largest void is expected to be greater than 10%
of the area which is analyzed.
Contrast Multiplier adjustment slider
Please, refer to section in Thin Solder Option for a description of the contrast multiplier
control.
In general, with the contrast multiplier slider set to 75, the blob detector returns a
very accurate void measurement. Lower values should be used if the faint features
are included in the measurement by the detector.
However, setting contrast multiplier too low might result in missing the detection of
true void regions.
Typical results of void percentage computation obtained with contrast multiplier set
to values 75, 20, and 5, are shown below.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 137

View Indicators

 Edge exclude
This is used to remove a specific area around the perimeter of the shape from the
analysis and is expressed as a percentage of the selected size. The results of
adjusting the slider are shown in their effects on the voiding calculation in real time.
Typically, 10 to 15% is a good setting to use for BGA balls.
 Max Eccentricity
The Max Eccentricity control is used to remove faint features from the analysis. This
control operates under the assumption that true voids in thick solder are
pseudo-elliptic in shape.
The Max Eccentricity slider can assume values from 0 (i.e. any bright region which is
not a circle is a faint feature) to 1 (i.e. any bright region which is not a straight line is
a void).
The results of adjusting the slider are shown in their effects on the voiding
calculation in real time.
 Min Convexity
The Min Convexity control is used to remove faint features from the analysis. This
control operates under the assumption that true voids in thick solder are convex
regions.
The control slider can assume values from 0% (i.e. any bright region is a true void)
to 100% (i.e. only a bright region whose contour is a convex polygon is a true void).
The results of adjusting the slider are shown in their effects on the voiding
calculation in real time.

10.3.3. Exporting Data

It is possible to export the results of analysis of BGA balls and Area Voids so that
they can be used for SPC purposes. This is particularly useful where an irregular
pitch is used for the BGA balls or manually drawn analysis areas are used.
138 User Guide V21.3 Software

10.3.3.1. What is Exported

The data file saved will be either CSV or XLSX format.
CSV format
CSV format will conform to the following specification.
Locale information will be used when writing the file, so that it will import correctly
into Excel. For example, in the UK the decimal point character will be ‘.’ and the
separator character will be ‘,’. In Germany, the decimal point character will be ‘,’ and
the separator character will be ‘;’. Strings will be surrounded with double quotes.
e.g.
UK 1.23,"abc","string, with separators",,,,
Germany 1,23;"abc";"string; with separators";;;;
 Leading and trailing spaces in a field will be ignored. String fields will be written
without leading and trailing spaces.
 All lines will be padded with separator characters so that they have the same
number of fields (ten).
 The last field in a line will not have a separator character after it. So each line
will have nine separator characters.
The first line of the file will contain header information, followed by the data for the
first feature on the second line of the file and so on. The data saved will be:
 Test Sample ID
 Feature ID Number
 X position
 Y position
 Pass / Fail result
 Diameter
 % Roundness
 Area
 % Overall Void
 % Largest Void
If the "Number manual features" option is not selected then the "Feature ID Number"
column will be empty.
If another set of void analysis data is added to the same file then the header
information is not repeated.
XLSX format
XLSX format will allow the saved file to be opened with Microsoft Excel or equivalent
compatible software.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 139

10.3.3.2. Exporting the data

The 'Export as' feature is part of the 'Void Measurements' minitab.

A "Save" button, a "Number the features" checkbox and an edit box for adding a
test sample ID string will be shown in the "Data" group of controls.

These controls will also have tooltips which will explain their usage more clearly.

10.3.3.3. Save Button

The "Save" button will open a file save dialog to enable the data
saved on screen to be saved to either a CSV file or an XLSX file format.
140 User Guide V21.3 Software

The file format is as follows;

 If the user enters the name of a file that already exists then there will not be a
warning that an existing file has been selected. Instead the data for the new
analysis will be appended to the end of the existing file. In this way, the results
for several analysis can be collected into one data file.
 If the "Number the features" option is not selected and the "Save" button is
pressed there will be a warning that the saved file will have no numbering
information.
 If the "Void" button has not been pressed then there is no void percentage
information available. If this happens then the "Save" button will be disabled.

10.3.3.4. Number the features Checkbox

If the "Number the features" checkbox is selected then the information that is
displayed on screen for each feature during a manual void analysis will be preceded
by an ID number (colored blue).

10.3.3.5. Test Sample ID Editbox

Whatever is entered into this edit box when the "Save" button is pressed will be
added to the "Test Sample" column of the saved data file.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 141

10.3.3.6. Sample CSV Data File

If the string "Sample 123" had been entered into the Test Sample ID edit box then
3
the data file for the results displayed above would be :

"Test sample", "ID" , "X Position", "Y Position", "Result",

"Diameter (um)", "% Roundness", "Area", "% Overall Void", "%
Largest Void"
"Sample 123",1,150,100,"fail",1200,100.0,1.132,1.7,1.7
"Sample 123",2,100,200,"fail",1200,100.0,1.132,0.0,0.0
"Sample 123",3,450,90,"fail",1200,100.0,1.132,1.6,0.8

If the Test Sample ID was changed to "Sample 456" and some more voids were
measured (four in total), then the new data was saved to the same file, the new file
would contain:

"Test sample", "ID" , "X Position", "Y Position", "Result",

"Diameter (um)", "% Roundness", "Area", "% Overall Void", "%
Largest Void"
"Sample 123",1,150,100,"fail",1200,100.0,1.132,1.7,1.7
"Sample 123",2,100,200,"fail",1200,100.0,1.132,0.0,0.0
"Sample 123",3,450,90,"fail",1200,100.0,1.132,1.6,0.8
"Sample 456",1,150,100,"fail",1200,100.0,1.132,1.7,1.7
"Sample 456",2,100,200,"fail",1200,100.0,1.132,0.0,0.0
"Sample 456",3,450,90,"fail",1200,100.0,1.132,1.6,0.8
"Sample 456",4,650,90,"pass",1100,100.0,0.998,1.6,0.8
142 User Guide V21.3 Software

10.3.3.7. XLSX Results

The report will be output in the Excel xlsx format.
The xlsx file format is part of the Open Office XML specification (see ISO/IEC
29500) and is used for representing spreadsheets.
The term ‘Pad’ is used instead of ball because the x-ray system software can be
used to analyze all shapes of solder pads and not just round BGA ball pads.
Field Description
Name of operator logged into the machine when analysis was
Operator
run.
Date The date when the analysis report was generated
Lot no Lot no associated with sample
2
Total Area Field of view area in micron
Pad Count Number of solder pad areas analyzed
Total Pad Area Sum of all the ‘Pad Area’s analyzed in microns
Total Pad Area
‘Total Pad Area’/’Total Area’ as a percentage
Ratio
Total Void Area Sum of all the ‘Void Area’s detected in microns
Total Void Area
‘Total Void Area’/’Total Pad Area’ as a percentage
Ratio
Pad Number Number of the pad as labeled in the image
2
Pad Area Pad area in micron
2
Void Area The area of the voids in the pad micron
Void Ratio Percentage area of the pad that has voids
Void Count Number of voids detected in the pad
Pass if both ‘Pad Area’ and ‘Void Ratio’ are within the analysis
Grade
limits
The following is an example of the form of the report:
User Guide V21.3 Software 143
144 User Guide V21.3 Software
 145

11. Measuring die and general voids manually

It is possible to measure the percentage voiding in any defined area or areas.
For general void measurement, each area is defined by drawing around the object
of interest using drawing tools.
The image intensifier should be set to view from straight-above the part.

Consult your line engineer for the correct recipe for this measurement (see page
65).

11.1. About region drawing tools

This procedure demonstrates the basic operation of the drawing tools.
1. Obtain an X-ray image.
2. Select the Ball and Die Void Measurement mini-tab.

3. Select Drawing Tools.

4. Select the draw rectangle tool.

Item Description
1 Selection tool
2 Rectangle tool
3 Three-point circle tool
4 Circle tool
5 Polygon tool
146 User Guide V21.3 Software

6 Freehand tool
5. Move across to the picture, choose one corner of the area of interest and click
and hold the left mouse button.
6. Move the mouse to the opposite corner to draw a rectangle around the object.
Note: Hold the Shift key on the keyboard whilst drawing to make a perfect
square, or hold the Ctrl key to draw symmetrically around the first point. Holding
both the Shift key and the Ctrl key will draw a perfect square symmetrically
around the first point.
7. Click the Add button if the shape is ok, or draw another.
8. Draw as many rectangles as required, adding each in turn by clicking on the Add
button.
Even if the rectangles overlap, the percentage voiding will be calculated for
each one. This means for example that the whole area of a die can be
measured and then perhaps a central region.
9. Select the circle tool and use it in a similar manner to draw ellipses.
Note: Hold the Shift key on the keyboard whilst drawing to make a perfect circle
or hold the Ctrl key to draw symmetrically around the first point. Holding both the
Shift key and the Ctrl key will draw a perfect circle symmetrically around the first
point.
10. Select the three-point circle tool, and click on three points around the area of
interest.
A circle will appear, passing through the three points. Click the Add button if the
shape is ok, or draw another.
11. Select the Polygon tool. A single left mouse click will create a mark. Define the
ROI by using as many marks as required. Right clicking after the final mark will
then draw straight lines between the marks in the order they were created. Click
the Add button if the shape is ok, or draw another.
12. Select the freehand tool. Hold the mouse key down and draw freehand around
any area, then release the mouse button.
The start and end points of the freehand line will automatically be joined by a
straight line to complete the enclosed area. Click the Add button if the shape is
ok, or draw another.
13. Click the selection tool, then click any drawn object to select it for sizing or
re-positioning.
14. Click the Clear button to clear all of the regions drawn.

11.1.1. Odd shaped regions

Odd shaped regions can be defined using the freehand tool as described above.
However, it is also possible to create some geometric shapes by combining other
standard shapes together.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 147

11.1.1.1. Merging two shapes

1. Draw a rectangle, and click Add.

2. Draw an overlapping circle.

3. Click Merge.

Many shapes may be merged together in this manner.

148 User Guide V21.3 Software

11.1.1.2. Deleting part of a shape

1. Draw a rectangle, and click Add.

2. Draw an overlapping circle.

3. Click Delete.

A shape may be modified many times in this manner.

11.1.1.3. Trimming a shape

1. Draw a rectangle, and click Add.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 149

2. Draw an overlapping circle.

3. Click Keep.

Only the area covered by both shapes is selected.

11.2. Measuring voids

Voids are measured as follows.
1. Select a voltage and power combination, along with any image enhancement
and frame average to obtain the clearest possible image of the voids.
2. Define the area(s) of interest using the drawing tools (see page 145).
3. Select Void Measurements mini-tab.

4. Select the AutoAdaptive method from the drop down list.

Other Void Threshold detection methods from the drop down list may give better
results. Refer to "Advanced tools (see page 154)" for further description.
5. Set Edge exclude to minimum (0%).
150 User Guide V21.3 Software

6. Set Largest Voids to maximum (All).

7. Set Min Void to minimum (0%).
8. Turn on the Limit % display and set the Limits for All voiding and an individual,
Ind, void, if required.
9. Click the Voids button.
A typical result is shown below.

11.3. Adding and removing void areas manually

1. Define the shape of the joint area using the automatic method.
2. Select one of the tools as appropriate.
3. Select the options as required.
These are:
 Treat overlapping areas separately
 Show void statistics
4. Define the void you want to analyze.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 151

5. Click on Add Void.

6. Identify additional voids as required.

7. Use the Delete Void button to remove it from the image, if you mark a void
incorrectly.
152 User Guide V21.3 Software

11.4. Display options

11.4.1. View Indicators
The functions on the View Indicators section of the Void Measurement mini tab are used
as follows.
These controls are only displayed if a 'Threshold' detection has been selected. If 'Blob
Detector' has been selected as the void detection method, different control options
will be displayed. Refer to 'Blob Detector (see page 128)' for further information.

 Edge exclude
This is used to remove a specific area around the perimeter of the shape from
the analysis and is expressed as a percentage of the selected size.
 Largest Voids
As heat dissipation is often an important property of die attach, this control
allows the user to select only the largest of the voids for analysis. For example,
a setting of 5 means that only the largest 5 voids will be indicated on-screen.
Note: The total void calculation shown on-screen will now ONLY be for the total
for the number of largest voids selected. Remember to return this slider to the
far right, All, position, after the analysis to ensure that future measurements
calculate the true total voiding.
 Min Void
Voids below a certain size may be better removed from the analysis.
As these voids individually are a very small percentage of the area, this control
is limited to 2.5% of the area.

11.4.2. Pass / fail limits

1. Enable Limit %.
2. Set the allowable percentage of voiding, and if required the maximum individual
void.

Note: If the limits are set to 0.0, then the measurements will be made on-screen
without highlighting any pass or fails.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 153

Measurements greater than these limits will be indicated in red.

Item Description
1 Overall voiding passed. Green text
2 Largest individual void - failed. Red outline
area and text at 1.
Note: Measurement limits may need to be set to tighter values than may be
required for production standards’
154 User Guide V21.3 Software

11.5. Advanced tools

11.5.1. Adaptive method
The adaptive method provides a better method for calculating void percentage
compared to the single threshold method when the background absorption in the
image is varying. For example, consider a die that is not co-planer to its substrate
and which causes a variation in the thickness of the die attach under the die. This
causes a density variation in the background level over the die. Measuring void
percentage under these conditions using a single grayscale threshold to defien the
voids would be inadequate in this case as the single threshold used to define what is
a void will not adjust to take into account the varying density of the background over
the die.
Adaptive thresholding offers this capability.
There are a number of controls associated with this method as described in the
following sections.
A section of the image from pass / fail limits (see page 152) will be used to illustrate
the effects of the controls.
It is recommended that the Auto button (1) is always used to establish some base
settings prior to fine adjustment.

There are several options available, from the drop down list, which can be selected
to achieve slightly different void threshold detection for the objects displayed on the
screen.

The option selected will dynamically change to suit the detected voids, so the best
choice can be made for the image displayed.
The list in the image above is shown complete. If options are not displayed, they
may have been disabled in the More Options menu (see page 34).
Some options will work better than others and will be affected by the varying grey
level densities of the image.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 155

11.5.2. Auto option

Selecting AutoAdaptive from the drop down list, will disable the manual adjustments
for the Adaptive void detection method.

Size adjustment slider

Each point or pixel on the picture is analyzed to determine if it is part of a void or
not.
As part of this analysis, the general intensity of the area around the point is
considered and compared with the central point.
The size adjuster slider specifies the size, in pixels, of each side of a square area
around the point.
In general, this must be bigger than the largest void expected or else the central part
of the void may be ignored. If it is too large, say as large as the part, then the
changes in background intensity that are intended to be rejected may be included as
part of the void.
In the image below:
 The red point in the image below represents the point of analysis.
 The green rectangle represents the size of the square being considered.
 The gray area represents the void.
156 User Guide V21.3 Software

If the size of the square being considered is too small, then the center of large voids
(1) will not be counted as they look the same as the surroundings.

Multiplier adjustment
Each point on the picture is analyzed to determine if it is part of a void or not.
As part of this analysis, the general intensity of the area around the point is
considered and compared with the central point.
The multiplier adjustment slider determines how strong the difference in intensity
must be in order to be taken as void.
The value set is used, along with a statistical calculation of the distribution of
intensities in the area, to determine if the point under consideration is part of the
void.
With the multiplier set higher, some fainter parts of the void (2) are missed.
Original Multiplier set too high

With the multiplier set too low, noise and very faint features (3) will be included.
Original Multiplier set too low
 User Guide V21.3 Software 157

Threshold measurement
The method described in multiplier adjustment (see page 156) is very sensitive in
detecting fluctuations in intensity.
However, in some parts of the sample there will be situations where there are no
voids within the area of consideration.
In this case, it is likely that the system will start to detect small fluctuations in
intensity that are not part of any voids.
The threshold slider control allows elimination of these unwanted hits and is usually
set to a starting value of 4 whilst the other controls are adjusted.
If it is not possible to eliminate unwanted voids by the use of the other two controls,
then start to increase this value, or increase the image averaging.
Original Threshold set too low

11.5.3. Manual method

It is possible to achieve die and ball measurements manually rather than relying on
the system to do it automatically. This is done as follows.
1. Select the Manual method from the drop down list.
2. Click the Auto button to make a best guess of the correct intensity of the voids.

The Auto detection method in the drop down list, can be used where there are
many separate selection shapes on the screen, all requiring a different intensity
setting. Using auto selection (see page 157) has more detail.
3. Click the Voids button to see the areas selected as voids.
4. Make any adjustments to the void intensity by moving the manual slider.
5. Adjust the view indicators (see page 152).
6. Set and adjust the inspection limits (see page 152).

Using auto selection

Using the Auto threshold detection method has a particular mode of operation, when
compared to the Manual detection method.
158 User Guide V21.3 Software

In this mode the intensity of the void is decided for each region of interest
individually.
In the example shown below, the operator has selected two regions on the screen.

Using the Auto button and the manual slider, it is impossible to find an X-ray
intensity that is suited to both regions, because the void intensity for each is
significantly different.

However, when the Auto option is selected, the two regions are analyzed separately
and an intensity appropriate for each is chosen.

11.5.4. Blob Detection method

It is also possible to use the Blob Detection method to analyze area voids. Refer to
'Blob Detector' (see page 128) for more details.
 159

12. Automatic BGA and void measurements

12.1. Creating a BGA routine
It is possible to setup automated BGA measurement routines, based on a reference
sample, that can be used as both stand alone or within an automated inspection
routine. The routines are created using the Automation Wizard which can be found
at the bottom of the BGA and Die Void measurement screen.

Note: The buttons are unnamed. However, if the mouse if hovered over a button a
tool tip will be displayed giving the button's function.
The automation wizard provides five options.
 Start new routine (1)
 Load an existing routine from the database (2)
 Execute the routine currently loaded (3)
 Save control settings to the database (4)
 Load control settings from the database (5)

When a routine is loaded, a sixth button, Save modified limits, is added.

160 User Guide V21.3 Software

Note: The software provides tool tips. When the mouse pointer is moved over an
unlabeled button a caption is displayed.
As you progress through the wizard information, instructions are displayed at the top
of the Automation panel.
During the following topics, it is assumed that an X-ray image is displayed.

12.1.1. Starting the BGA Wizard

1. Before creating an automated routine, ensure that the height has been set
correctly for the BGA balls of the sample being tested (see page 60).
If this is not set correctly, the analysis results will be inaccurate and BGA balls
may not be identified correctly.
2. Click the Start new routine button to begin the creation process.
As you progress through the wizard information, instructions are displayed at
the top of the Automation panel.
If an incorrect choice is made at any step, simply click the Back button to move
back one step at a time. Click on the Stop button at any time to cancel and exit
the wizard.

12.1.2. Choosing the automation type

1. Select the BGA option required from the drop down list.

The drop down list gives a choice of inspection types:-

Traditional single step BGA inspection. Useful for
BGA single shot
regular small BGA devices.
BGA single shot A circular filter is applied around each BGA ball
(Ball Filter) to reduce the effect from occlusions.
Traditional multi step BGA inspection. Used for
BGA Multi Shot large regular BGA devices or where more
accuate analysis is required.
BGA Multi Shot
A circular filter is applied around each BGA ball.
(Ball Filter)
The inspection is a single step but the BGA
One Shot BGA
layout is created from a CAD template. Used for
from template
irregular BGA layouts.
BGA Multi Shot Multi step inspection for large BGA devices
from template created from a CAD template.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 161

Wafer bump one Single shot analysis for wafer bump devices
shot created from a CAD template.
Wafer bump multi Multi shot analysis for wafer bump devices
shot created from a CAD template.
Area Void Void measurements in other component types.
The list in the table above is shown complete. If options are not displayed, they
may have been disabled in the More Options menu (see page 34).
2. Click Fwd to advance to the next step.
If the Single Shot option is selected, the analysis routine will only acquire a single top down
image of the whole BGA array for analysis. This will provide a much quicker result but is not as
accurate because it is a much larger Field of View and some of the detail may be lost.
This is OK for small arrays containing only a few BGA balls but it is not recommended for
larger arrays.

12.1.3. Selecting threshold and ball size

1. Move the image so that the entire BGA is visible on the screen.
2. Select and apply any Image Enhancement that may be required to improve the
image displayed on screen. Select the best threshold detection method from the
drop down list, to give the best and most accurate outline result on the displayed
image. Set the required ball sizes so that the majority of the balls are outlined.

3. It will be necessary to click the Find Outlines button to show the selected outlines
on the image.

4. Click Fwd to advance to the next step.

12.1.4. Removing unwanted objects

1. Remove unwanted objects that have been outlined, such as those shown in the
red rectangles in the image below.
162 User Guide V21.3 Software

This can be done by clicking on or near each object or by use of the drawing
tab's controls.
Unwanted objects can also be removed using the Include sizes slider to reduce
the number of objects selected.
2. Ensure that the only objects that are outlined are BGA balls before you click
the Fwd button to go to the next step of the process.
Any invalid objects will affect the calculations performed by the software.

3. Click Fwd to advance to the next step.

12.1.5. Setting the correct pitch

When this step is displayed the software will automatically calculate the dimensions
of the BGA and draw a graphical representation of the BGA on to the image.
The software shows the Horizontal Pitch and Vertical Pitch that have been calculated
and also selects the closest known value from the list.
1. The system can be forced to use the Measured value rather than the nearest
known standard value by selecting the measured options from the two lists as
required.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 163

If the nearest known value is selected, the software will automatically adjust the
measured 'Set Height' to correct for any slight measurement differences, after
the '>Fwd' button has been pressed.

An example of the resultant view is given below.

If the value should be one of the known values, but has been measured to be
significantly different, this is probably the result of an incorrectly set height for
this BGA.
If this is the case, cancel the creation process and set the height for the BGA
(see page 60) then restart the wizard.
2. Click '>Fwd' to advance to the next step.
164 User Guide V21.3 Software

12.1.6. Selecting what to include

1. Check the displayed image for required/not required balls.

Remove any balls that are not required for measurement.

The balls are simply included or excluded by clicking within each ball's outline to
toggle it off/on.
There are two states which can be selected.
a) A solid red ball - indicating the BGA ball is to be included in the auto
inspection.
b) A white outline only - indicating the ball is not to be included or no ball is
present.
2. Special attention should be paid to balls that maybe obstructed by other
components, as these could be seen as bridges and produce invalid results.

Two of the four balls (1) in the image are deliberately missing. The software
decided correctly.
The balls in the bottom-right and top-right of the image (2) are obscured by
components. The software is not sure what to do so has excluded it. If this is a
real situation, then the balls should be left excluded. However, they can be
included if required by clicking inside the circles.
3. The ball in the bottom-left of the image (3) has been excluded by the software
for no obvious reason. The User should manually include this ball by clicking in
the circle to make the ball a solid red color.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 165

4. Click Fwd to advance to the next step.

BGA balls can be painted in by holding down the Ctrl key and covering the
outlines with the mouse. This is useful if there are a large number of BGA balls
missed due to occlusions that should be included.

12.1.7. Identifying ball A1 and B1

This step identifies each ball with a unique label for the device so that resulting data
can be tracked against CAD position, for example.

1. Click on the ball that is to be designated as A1 for this device. Ball A1 must be a
corner ball but can be any one of the four corner balls.
2. Click on one of the edge balls adjacent to that selected as A1.
This will become B1. Depending on which adjacent ball is chosen to suit this
requirement, the ball labeling will have the numbers running horizontally and the
letters vertically, or vice versa.

3. Click the Fwd button when the numbering has been set.
166 User Guide V21.3 Software

12.1.8. Choosing the measurement settings

If the BGA measurements were to be made with all of the balls in the device visible
on-screen at the same time, then because each ball would only comprise of a few
pixels, the precision of the measurement would be seriously affected. Therefore, the
software deliberately splits up the BGA into smaller sections during the
measurement, using higher magnification or smaller Field of View (FOV), so
allowing more pixels per ball on-screen and thereby better measurement precision.
At this point in the wizard, the software automatically zooms-in, to a preset level, on
to the first ball found in the device array.
If the One Shot BGA option had been chosen at the start of the BGA Wizard then
the option to alter the FOV would be skipped.
The user may now alter the FOV from the preset level to show more, or less, balls
on screen. However, a trade-off must be made between having fewer balls
on-screen and therefore having improved precision compared to the speed of
stepping through all of the smaller sections into which the BGA will be sub-divided.
Fewer balls on-screen will mean many more sections to look through and therefore
a longer time to measure all of the balls.
Note: The frame average rate will be applied to each of the smaller section
measurements. A recommended setting for the frame average is 16 - 128 fps.

1. Set the frame average to the required frames per second (fps).
2. Select the threshold level to use for the BGA measurement limits as
appropriate, or leave as Auto detect.
The measurements required are selected by checking or clearing the boxes as
required. Refer to 'Measuring ball grid arrays (BGA) manually (see page 115)'
for further details.

3. If limits are required for the measurements to provide pass/fail information, then
the appropriate values should be entered into the low/high boxes. Set the
low/high values to zero in order to just obtain the measurements for eh balls
without any pass/fail indication.
4. Select 'Find Outlines' button to identify the BGA balls within the set parameters.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 167

5. Click Fwd to advance to the next step.

12.1.9. Setting void parameters

1. Choose the required void parameter settings (see page 124) for the current
BGA, selecting the appropriate Void Detection method to give the best results
for the image displayed.

2. Click the Fwd button to progress to the next step once the settings have been
chosen.

12.1.10. Saving the routine

When the Fwd button is clicked, a Save Settings dialog box is displayed.

1. If you wish to overwrite an existing routine, either select the routine in the list
window or type its name in the Name field.
2. If you wish to save as a new routine, type a unique name in the Name field.
3. Click OK.
168 User Guide V21.3 Software

4. If you are overwriting an existing routine, click Yes in the warning message that
appears.

12.2. Creating an automated void measurement routine

12.2.1. Starting the Void Wizard
Starting the wizard
1. Before creating an automated routine, ensure that the height has been set
correctly for the sample being tested. (see page 60)
If this is not set correctly, the analysis results will be inaccurate.
2. Click the Start new routine button to begin the creation process.
As you progress through the wizard information, instructions are displayed at
the top of the Automation panel.
If an incorrect choice is made at any step, simply click the Back button to move
back one step at a time. Click on the Stop button at any time to cancel and exit
the wizard.

12.2.2. Choosing the automation type - void measurement

1. Select the Area void option from the drop down list.
2. Click Fwd to advance to the next step.

12.2.3. Defining the area outline

1. Center the area that is to have the void measured on the screen and set the
field of view at which the analysis should be made.

2. Identify the outline of the area to be analyzed for voids by doing either of the
following:
 User Guide V21.3 Software 169

 Use the Find Outlines method. This is done by setting the threshold level and

clicking the Find Outline button on the BGA Outline

Measurements minitab.

 Manually drawing the area of interest. (see page 145)

Example of void area

12.2.4. Setting the void parameters and limits

1. Configure the void parameters to generate the required void measurement (see
page 149), selecting the appropriate Void Detection method to give the best
results for the image displayed.
170 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Set suitable measurements for the overall void and/or largest individual void
settings, if it is intended that the routine is to produce pass/fail data.

Note: If the Limits are set to 0.0 then the measurements will be made and stored
but without highlighting any pass or fails.
3. Click Fwd to advance to the next step.

12.2.5. Saving the routine

When the Fwd button is clicked, a Save Settings dialog box is displayed.

1. If you wish to overwrite an existing routine, either select the routine in the list
window or type its name in the Name field.
2. If you wish to save as a new routine, type a unique name in the Name field.
3. Click OK.
4. If you are overwriting an existing routine, click Yes in the warning message that
appears.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 171

12.3. Inspecting wire sweep automatically

The system can be configured to automatically measure all wires within a given
pattern.
Note: Automated measurements are for use only with wire bonding which has a ball
bond at one end and a wedge bond at the other.
1. Before creating an automated routine, ensure that the height has been set
correctly for the sample being tested. (see page 60)
If this is not set correctly, the analysis results will be inaccurate.
2. Select the Ball and Die Void Measurement mini-tab.
3. Select Auto wire-sweep.

This minitab may not be visible. Refer to More Options (see page 34) for more
details regarding visibility of the Analysis minitabs.

4. Click on the Start a new routine wizard.

5. Define the device template.

A blue box will be shown on the image.
6. Do the following:
 Move the area of interest inside this box.
 Click and drag a box around the area of interest which must remain within
the blue border.
7. Define the first fiducial area, which must be around a distinct feature within the
area marked above.
If an inappropriate point is used, a warning will be given.
172 User Guide V21.3 Software

More information on how the system creates and uses fiducials is available (see
page 270).

8. Define the second fiducial area in the same manner.

9. Adjust the zoom so that wires can be seen clearly.

10. Define wire thickness by drawing a box over the chosen wire using the Draw

button or enter a value for the wire in microns (um).

 User Guide V21.3 Software 173

11. Click the Accept button if the displayed defined wire thickness values should be
applied.

12. Enter fault limit as a %.

13. Click the Accept button to apply the defined fault tolerance.

14. Define wire end points by clicking on the ball end and then on the wedge end of
the chosen wire.
174 User Guide V21.3 Software

Note: It is very important to click the ball end first then on the wedge end of wires
to be measured.
15. Repeat the previous step for the remaining wires as required or click & hold the
mouse button to drag the image to a new wire position and continue as in step
14.

16. If a mistake is made then the last defined wire can be removed by clicking the
Delete Last Wire button.

17. At any point during the creation of the routine, it can be canceled by clicking the
stop button then selecting Yes on the displayed warning dialog window.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 175

18. Click the Save routine button .

12.4. Inspecting a Quad-flatpacked No Lead (QFN) device

When creating a Quad-flatpacked No Lead inspection routine, like all Automated
Inspection, the user needs to spend some time ensuring a good Xray image is
obtained, with a good contrast between the gray scales seen. This is achieved by
adjusting the Tube voltage and Power levels. Generally the detail of the image seen
will be improved by increasing the Tube voltage to allow for increased X-ray
penetration of the sample and the brightness will be increased by adjusting the
Power setting but a good balance of the two is required for the best image.
Once a good contrasting image has been achieved with the voltage and power
settings, an image averaging of 128 is recommended to give a good equalized
image.

12.4.1. Creating a QFN routine

The system can be configured to automatically analyze the pads and center contact
areas of QFN devices.
1. Before creating an automated routine, ensure that the height has been set
correctly for the sample being tested. (see page 60)
If this is not set correctly, the analysis results will be inaccurate.
2. Select the Ball and Die Void Measurement minitab.
176 User Guide V21.3 Software

3. Select the Quad Flat Pack No-Leads minitab.

This minitab may not be visible. Refer to More Options (see page 34) for more
details regarding visibilty of the Analysis minitabs.

4. Click the Start Wizard button, , and follow the on screen

instructions displayed in the Automation dialog box.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 177

This is done using a left mouse click and drag to completely surround the device
being inspected.

5. The wizard will automatically proceed to the next step.

178 User Guide V21.3 Software

As before a single pad is outlined by using the left mouse button and dragging a
box around the entire Pad.

It is recommended that the pad is outlined with enough clear space around so
that the grayscale of the pad and paste can be clearly identified.
6. Once a single pad has been outlined, the solder threshold needs to be set.

A slider will become available so the user can set the outline of the solder. This
will be used for all of the QFN pads.

7. Once the '>Fwd' button is pressed the software will attempt to find the remaining
Pads on all four sides of the device, using the parameters set in steps 5 and 6.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 179

Automatic definition of the pads can sometimes fail because a pad outside of
the defined inspection area has been identified. In the event of this happening
the operator must go back a step and enlarge the inspection area.

Sometimes an occlusion will prevent this from happening or the first pad did not
have enough detail in order for the software to identify all the pads. When this
happens the operator can decide whether to go back and redraw the original
pad or to leave it and inspect any missing pads manually.
8. The User will then have a choice to deselect any identified pads, or to redefine
all the pads.

Press '>Fwd' to continue.

180 User Guide V21.3 Software

9. A center pad can be identified by clicking the appropriate button and using the
left mouse to click and drag an outline.

10. Once a center pad has been identified it is possible to use the two drawing tools

to mask any areas that are not to be

included in the analysis.
For example any vias that are directly underneath the center pad.

.
Once a mask has been drawn it has to be accepted using the accept button,

, before it is eliminated from the analysis.

 User Guide V21.3 Software 181

Once accepted the mask is shown with a white outline .

11. The next step is to identify the Pad numbering scheme.

A QFN device will not necessarily have Pad 1 starting at a corner and numbers
can run either Clockwise or Counter Clockwise.
The numbers will be allocated automatically once the start and direction have
been identified. The center pad will always be identified as 'center'. The font size
can be adjusted from the 'More Options' menu (see page 34).
12. The parameters for identifying voids within the solder now need to be set.
182 User Guide V21.3 Software

This is done by adjusting the two sliders .

These parameters will affect all pads including the center pad.
13. The next step is to enter values for the maximum allowable voiding.

Independent values can be entered for the pads and the Center Pad.

14. To save the routine, click the Save button, .

 User Guide V21.3 Software 183

This will open a Save As dialog window in the same way as other automation
routines.

12.5. Inspecting Devices using Pad Analysis

When creating a Pad Analysis Routine, like all Automatic Inspection, the user needs
to spend some time ensuring a good Xray image is obtained, with a good contrast
between the gray scales seen. This is achieved by adjusting the Tube voltage and
Power levels. Generally the detail of the image seen will be improved by increasing
the Tube voltage to allow for increased X-ray penetration of the sample and the
brightness will be increased by adjusting the Power setting but a good balance of
the two is required for the best image.
Once a good contrasting image has been achieved with the voltage and power
settings, an image averaging of 128 is recommended to give a good equalized
image.

12.5.1. Creating a Pad Analysis Routine

1. Before creating an automated routine, ensure that the height has been set
correctly for the sample being tested. (see page 60)
If this is not set correctly, the analysis results will be inaccurate.
2. Select the Ball and Die Void Measurement tab.
184 User Guide V21.3 Software

3. Select the AnalysisPads minitab.

This minitab may not be visible. Refer to More Options (see page 34) for more
details regarding visibilty of the Analysis minitabs.

4. Click the Start Wizard button, and follow the instructions

displayed in the automation box.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 185

5. Click 'Fwd' to proceed. The drawn box will then turn Green and the next
instruction will be displayed in the Automation box (To draw the box use the left
mouse button and define a rectangle, releasing the mouse button when
complete.).

The box will remain Red but the outline of the pad will be defined along with the
calculated solder area using automatic threshold settings. Click the 'Accept Pad'

button if the displayed result is acceptable or redraw the box.

The drawn box will then turn Green defining the first pad. Continue to define
pads individually, accepting each one in turn until all pads are defined.
186 User Guide V21.3 Software

6. It is possible to adjust the default thresholds used to define the Pad and Solder
area by selecting the 'Manual Threshold' checkbox.

These sliders affect all of the defined pads within the current routine. The
defined Pad Area is outlined in Dark Blue and the Solder Area is outlined in
Cyan. Voids will be outlined in either Red or Green depending on the limits set
in the next step. The Void Threshold slider and Edge Exclusion slider can be
used together to identify the voids whilst ignoring the lighter gray areas around
the edge of the pad.
7. Click 'Fwd' to proceed.

8. Enter a value for each limit in the appropriate text box.

Min. Solder % is the minimum amount of solder allowed for the defined pad as a
percentage.
Min. Solder Area is the minimum amount of solder allowed for the defined pad as
an area in sq.mm.
Max. Individual Void % and Max. Total Voids% are the maximum voids allowed in the
solder area NOT the defined pad.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 187

9. Click 'Fwd' to proceed and save the routine.

12.6. Loading an existing automation routine

Once an automation routine has been defined and saved it can be recalled at
anytime to be executed, providing an easy way to make measurements using the
same settings every time.

12.6.1. Selecting the routine

1. Click on the Load existing routine button.

188 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Select the required routine from the displayed list by either double clicking the
program or typing the program name in the text box and pressing OK.

12.6.2. Routine loaded

The name of the routine will be displayed in the message window when the routine
is successfully loaded.
If the load fails a message will be displayed in the message window.

12.7. Executing a routine

Once a routine has been created or loaded, it
can be executed with the click of a single
button.
If the button looks like this, then the button is
not available because a valid routine is not
loaded.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 189

Once the button is pressed the software will automatically perform the requested
measurements at the current location.
Care must therefore be taken to ensure that the current view is similar to the view
used to setup the routine. The software will automatically adjust for any difference in
magnification, but cannot adjust, except in a very minor way, for any positional offsets.
Once the software has finished performing the requested measurements the system
will display the results and, provided the execution was successful, will also
automatically generate an HTML report containing the results. The results will be
displayed in the results window of the automated inspection tab.

12.7.1. BGA execution

When executing a BGA measurement the system performs a number of steps to
ensure the accuracy of the measurements. A number of these steps involve
automatic movement of the image before the positioning of the BGA on the screen.
There will also be some outlines drawn on the screen during the measurement. The
movement and the outlines are the standard operating characteristics of the
software.

12.7.2. Failed execution

If the execution of a routine fails for any reason, the results below will be displayed.

Void routine failures

It is unlikely that a void routine will fail to execute, as it is always possible for a void
measurement to be performed.
The only cause of failure is if the void mask image that is stored in a file on the hard
disk has been deleted or is corrupt. If a routine repeatedly fails to execute, a new
routine should be created.
If an object is misaligned, then the routine will produce measurements that are
invalid but this will only generate a failure if the measurements fall outside the limits
set for the routine.
BGA routine failures
If the execution of a BGA routine fails, check the following.
1. Ensure Set Height has been performed for the BGA.
2. Ensure the BGA is positioned correctly and check the following:
 The whole BGA should be visible on the screen.
 There should be a significant gap between the right side of the BGA and the
right side of the image.
190 User Guide V21.3 Software

 If the BGA fills the majority of the screen, even at the lowest magnification,
then the BGA should be positioned as far to the left as possible whilst
leaving all of the balls in the far left column in view.
3. Ensure the current brightness and contrast settings are the same as those used
when the BGA routine was taught. This is particularly necessary if manual
thresholds have been used.
4. Consider adjusting the tube kV and power and re-creating the BGA routine so
as to make the balls appear with more contrast on-screen.
Wire Sweep failures
Generally a wire sweep will fail because the system cannot identify all or some of
the wires of the device. If this occurs repeatedly, a new routine should be created.
QFN failures
QFN failures will normally only occur if the device being inspected is outside of the
mask stored for inspection. When this happens reposition the sample being
inspected to the center of the screen. If this occurs repeatedly, a new routine should
be created.
Pad Analysis failures
Pad Analysis failures will normally only occur if the device being inspected is outside
of the mask stored for inspection. When this happens reposition the sample being
inspected to the center of the screen. If this occurs repeatedly, a new routine should
be created.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 191

12.7.3. Successful execution

If the execution of an automated measurement routine is successful, the system
should display a message giving the location of the report file. Successful execution
does not mean that the results have passed; this will depend on the measurements
and the pass/fail limits that were set when the routine was defined.
The message window will also contain a link that, if clicked, will display the report file
using the PC default internet browser.
The ActivX content may have to be enabled in the browser for the results to be
displayed correctly.

12.7.4. Results
The results are displayed in two formats, an on-line format and an off-line report,
which takes the form of an HTML file. The system will also generate a result file in
CSV format. The name of the result files will take the format YYYYMODDHHMISS
where:
YYYY = the year
MO = The month
DD = The day
HH = The hour
MI = The minute
SS = The second
192 User Guide V21.3 Software

On-line BGA report

The report below is from a BGA routine execution.

The red X (1) indicates that the routine contains at least one fail so the whole routine
is marked as a fail.
Results can be expanded to view the actual measurements by clicking the box (2).
Failed balls and measurements are indicated by additional red crosses (3).
On-line void report
 User Guide V21.3 Software 193

On-line QFN report

On-line Pad Analysis report

194 User Guide V21.3 Software

Off-line BGA report

The graphical display shows the location of failed balls marked in red.
 Click on a ball to view the detailed results for that ball.

This ball has This ball has failed one

passed all the or more defined
defined tests parameters
This ball is Bridged This ball is missing but
to an adjacent ball. should be present.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 195

The legend used indicates if a ball has passed all of the defined tests. If a ball has
failed one, or more, of the defined tests, is a bridge, or is missing it is marked as a
fail. A missing ball is defined as a ball that should be present based upon the
reference sample but is not. It should not be confused with locations where balls are
not present in the reference device, for example in the center of the shown example.
Off-line void report
196 User Guide V21.3 Software

Off-line Wire Sweep report

 User Guide V21.3 Software 197

Off-line QFN report

198 User Guide V21.3 Software

Off-line Pad Analysis report

12.8. Changing measurement limits

Change the limits for an automation routine as follows.
1. Load the routine.
2. Change the limits.

3. Click the Save routine button.

12.9. Template Based Analysis

The template based analysis provides functionality for users to define the shape of a
device using the CAD editor, or to import an existing CAD file, and then execute a
series of instructions to analyze the device under inspection.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 199

12.9.1. Using the CAD editor

The CAD editor is a simple but flexible tool for either modifying data imported from
files (AutoCAD DXF mainly) or creating templates from scratch by drawing shapes
over the top of the corresponding x-ray image. The accuracy of the CAD data is
maintained to a minimum of 3 decimal places and all drawing tools operate at this
precision.
The CAD editor embraces the notion of ‘layers’ of related shapes for ease of
selection and visualization. The interpretation of the shapes on each layer or how
the shapes are distributed across layers is mostly up to the individual user however,
different analysis may require some layers to be marked in certain ways to indicate
a level of pre-processing by the user to speed up the analysis.
When the user has finished importing or creating the needed CAD template in the
CAD editor, it must be exported to the template library to make it available to the
analysis engine.
The CAD editor employs a standard coordinate system with X increasing from left to
right and Y increasing from bottom to top. All units are in metric MILLIMETERS
inside the editor environment although the CAD data import dialog does have
options for importing and converting other units.

12.9.1.1. Layer Types

The field/column to the immediate left of the layer name in the layer list assigns an
attribute to all shapes on that layer that may be picked up by the analysis engine.

It is useful to allow the user some level of pre-processing of the CAD data in order
to minimize the decision phases of a particular analysis and to therefore, speed up
the analysis time. Currently, this column may indicate 4 attribute states.
1. Neutral or decorative. The user may add any shapes or text as helps with
device identification or alignment/placement. These layers do NOT take part in
any analysis and only have a minimal draw overhead.
200 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Targets. All shapes on this layer form the input to the image analysis engine, the
interpretation of which will depend entirely on the analysis type.

3. Fiducials. These shapes may define references that are used by the analysis
engine to generate placement and/or alignment/rotational data.

4. Region-of-interest. These shapes define areas that contain target shapes that
are of particular interest during analysis (or conversely, are of NO particular or
dubious interest).

Different analysis may use all, some or none of these layer attributes – it depends
completely on the analysis type.

12.9.1.2. Project Tools

The CAD editor environment is controlled by the top-most 4 buttons. These are:
1. Clear. Remove all the current design data and creates an empty layer ready for
editing.
2. Import. Import design data from an existing file.
3. Export. Writes the current design data to a file in Dage’s proprietary format.
4. Merge. Appends data from a file to that already loaded.

12.9.1.3. Editor Modes

The editor operates at any given time, in one of 4 edit modes which define how the
CAD editor interacts with the rest of the x-ray application.
1. Hide. All the layers are invisible and non-responsive to user input.
2. Float. All the layers are visible and click-dragging will move the x-ray image
behind the CAD layers. Useful for aligning the image with the CAD data.
3. Lock. The CAD layers are visible and will move with the x-ray image as the user
click-drags.
4. Edit. The layers and/or x-ray image cannot be click-dragged and all the edit tools
are now available.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 201

12.9.1.4. Layer Tools

The layer structure is visualized via the layer list. The state of each layer has the
following attributes:
1. Color. The color is randomly generated when a layer is created but clicking once
in the layer color column accesses the color change dialog.
2. Visibility. This column has a small ‘eye’ icon which can be toggles to show/hide
the layer
3. Locked. The layer is visible but cannot be edited.
4. Analysis interpretation. Specifies how the analysis engine might interpret the
shape data on the layer.

The buttons to the right of the layer list are used for manipulating the CAD layer
structure.
1. Rename. Used to set/change the name of the current layer.
2. Add. Create a new layer with a randomly assigned color.
3. Delete. Remove the current layer.
4. Save As. Save the current layer to file (Dage’s proprietary XML format).
5. Move DN. Move the current layer down one.
6. Move UP. Move the current layer up one.
As previously mentioned, layers are great for managing large amounts of related
visual data. As the CAD data gets, potentially, very substantial, the CAD editor has
extra tools to help manage these layers visually. These tools are found immediately
below the layer list.
1. Show All. Display all shapes on all visible layers
2. Show Selected. Display only the selected shapes.
202 User Guide V21.3 Software

3. Show Invert. Toggle the current show state of all shapes.

There are 4 checkbox controls immediately below the SHOW buttons which enable
some useful productivity features designed to de-clutter the display when doing fine
edits. These are:
1. Enable layer auto-select. When a shape is selected, its layer is automatically
selected as well.
2. Auto-hide unselected layers. Hides all but the current layer you are working on.
3. Enable polygon fill. Solid polygons can obscure detail below them. This feature
allows the user to disable polygon filling so obscured detail can be viewed.
4. Show Labels. Text labels have a fixed font size and can quickly hide small details
if there are enough of them. This control allows us to hide labels when editing.

12.9.1.5. Template Edit Tools

These tools are split into 2 groups – those that draw or erase a shape and those that
replicate existing shapes.

More advanced tools are available when operating in Engineer Access level. These
can be displayed by selecting the 'Show advanced edit options' checkbox. Refer to
Advanced Tools for further details.

Creation Tools

1. Select. Select that shape closest to the mouse click whilst obeying the
layer selection rules.

2. Ellipse. Draw an ellipse (or circle).

3. Rectangle. Draw a rectangle (or square).

 User Guide V21.3 Software 203

4. Polyline/Polygon. Draws a polyline (an unclosed polygon) or a polygon

shape. Polyline drawing is terminated by right-clicking when defining the last
vertex. A polygon is closed by left-clicking on the start vertex (a yellow square
will appear around the first vertex when the user is close enough to it to close
the polygon).

5. 3-Point Circle Defines a circle from 3 mouse clicks around the circle
circumference.

6. Eraser. Works by ‘painting’ out the shapes that you want to erase. Very
useful for deleting fine detail or when working close in.
Both Rectangle and Ellipse can use the SHIFT key to constrain the shape to be
square or circular and the Ctrl key to create from the center out (rather than a
corner). All shapes except POLYGON may have a line width assigned via the shape
attributes editor and only a polygon shape may be filled.

Replication Tools

1. Linear Copy. The shape is copied along a line starting at the first left
mouse button hold (which selects the shape as well) and ends on a point
defined by the left mouse button release. The number of copies defaults to 5
which can be modified by the cursor keys BEFORE the second point is defined.
Pressing the right arrow cursor key will increase the number of repeats while the
left arrow will decrease the number.

2. Array Copy. Similar to the linear tool except 3 click-release events define
2 orthogonal axes of a rectangle or a regular trapezoid to create an array of
shape duplications. The first linear copy is made as before; left mouse button
and hold on the object to be copied, drag the cursor to the required end point,
use the left and right arrow cursor keys to define the number of object
repetitions, and set the point by releasing the left mouse button. Dragging the
mouse cursor to a third location, usually at right angles to the first set, will
duplicate the entire row. The use of the Up and Down arrow cursor keys will
define the number of repetitions. Set the final point by a single left mouse click.
The entire array will then be outlined in a yellow box to indicate a complete set
of objects.
204 User Guide V21.3 Software
 User Guide V21.3 Software 205

3. Irregular Array Copy. Similar to the array copy except that 4 left mouse
button click events are used to define an irregular or distorted array of
duplications. Cursor keys control the number of duplication along each axis
a.k.a. the array copy tool. The first left mouse button hold will select the object to
be copied, dragging the cursor to the first point and releasing the mouse button
to set the first line. Moving the cursor again will start to duplicate the line of
objects. A second left mouse button hold and drag will allow the lines to be
skewed as required. Releasing the left mouse button will set the final point.

In all cases, the editor reverts to the previous creation tool after one use of a
replication tool to stop unexpected array duplications happening.
206 User Guide V21.3 Software

Shape Selection
Once the SELECT tool is engaged, left-clicks can be used to select single shapes or
left-click + SHIFT to perform multiple shape selection (multi-selected shapes are
shown in WHITE with a YELLOW rectangle bounding the selection). Multi-selection
is also accomplished by right-dragging a bounding box around the shapes to be
selected.
In general, the shape closest to the click point is selected. For rectangles and
ellipses, selection occurs at the shape center or on the shape edge. For polylines
and polygons, selection occurs along the edge of the shape or at any vertex. Once a
shape is selected it turns WHITE with small, RED drag handles/vertex markers. The
drag handles/vertex markers may be dragged to re-position/re-size the shape.
Shapes are de-selected by right-clicking when using any creation tool including the
SELECT tool. When using the SELECT tool, left-clicking over empty space will also
de-select the shapes. At any time, selected shapes can be deleted by pressing the
DEL key.
Double-clicking on a selected shape at one of its selection points will open the shape
attribute editor.

Shape Attributes Editor

This dialog allows the user to specify the color, line width (if applicable) and assign a
label to individual shapes. It optionally, allows us to replicate these changes to all
similar shapes on the same layer.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 207

To change the shape color, double-click the color to bring up the color change
dialog. To apply the color to all similar shapes on this layer, check the ‘Apply to ALL
shapes on this layer’ checkbox before pressing the ‘Ok’ button. To create a label, type
the text for the label into ‘Prefix’ edit field and select ‘None’ in the auto ID ‘Mode’ drop
list control. Other modes are available to auto increment the ID value as replication
of the shape is applied. This is very useful for labeling BGA grid arrays.
To place the label relative to the shape center, click in the corresponding ‘Align’ grid
cell. The selected cell will turn RED to indicate the current placement.
The following image shows a single ellipse with a line thickness of 0.3mm, with a
label prefix of ‘U’ and ‘Auto increment on copy’ selected as the auto ID mode. The
shape was replicated using the regular array tool to define a trapezoid array of
ellipses. See how the label ID value was automatically incremented each time the
shape was copied. The shapes are also multi-selected, as shown by the bounding
YELLOW rectangle.
208 User Guide V21.3 Software

Advanced Tools
When operating in Engineer Access level there are more advanced tools available
for use when creating or editing CAD files. These are accessed by checking the
'Show advanced edit options' check box.
The Data tab allows for accurate positional and size adjustments for each object

The Align tab allows for objects to be aligned in a specific way or rotated by 90
degree steps.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 209

The Grids tab allows an alignment grid to be displayed. It is also possible to adjust
the grid color, size, and how strong to 'snap' points to the intersections.

If the Grid snap is activated, it can prevent small features from being drawn easily.

12.9.1.6. Template Library Access

Multiple templates for different CAD-driven analysis are stored in the Template
Library. In fact, the template library is the ONLY place that the analysis engine has
access to CAD templates.
Once a CAD template has been created, either by direct file import or by using the
CAD editor’s creation tools, it must be saved to the template library. This is
accomplished by the ‘Save to library’ button at the bottom of the CAD editor panel.
Once a template is saved to the template library, it can be brought back into the
editor but it does so as a single, closed shape that cannot be further edited except
for placement. If you wish to save a work in-progress, use the ‘Save’ to write a
temporary copy of your work to a file in Dage’s own XML format where it can be
re-loaded at anytime.
Flip data on load. This checkbox option allows for situation where the board is loaded
into the x-ray machine ‘upside-down’. It simply flips the CAD data vertically (Y axis)
when a template is imported from the template library.
210 User Guide V21.3 Software

The ‘Load from Library’ button will display the Template Library Browser dialog as shown
below. This dialog is also displayed during the setup of an analysis to allow the user
to select the CAD template to use for analysis.
Use the content navigation window at the far left to select the template (a simplified
preview image will be generate) then press the ‘Ok’ button to close the dialog and
import the selected template.
Several library maintenance functions are available from this dialog to add templates
(defined using Dage’s proprietary XML format) or to remove templates from the
library.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 211

12.9.2. Creating a CAD template

The system needs to be placed in either Supervisor or Engineer Access mode to be
able to access the required CAD tools to create a new CAD template file.
Note: The following screenshots were with the system in Engineer Access mode.
With the device under test (DUT) displayed on the Inspect Screen set a suitable
X-ray voltage and Power to give a good contrasting image.
Select the CAD Editor minitab.
212 User Guide V21.3 Software

Select ‘Add’ to add a new layer and to open the CAD Edit Tools window.

Use the CAD Edit Tools to create the required design on the screen. E.g. Select the
rectangle tool and while holding the left mouse button down, drag from one corner to
the opposite corner to define a rectangle.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 213

With the select tool highlighted, double click the drawn shape to set a label and the
position of the label.

Continue in to use the CAD Edit tools to create the required template shape for
inspection, setting each individual shape with a unique label.
214 User Guide V21.3 Software

Set the layer as an object and lock it.

Add a new layer and set it as a Region of Interest.

 User Guide V21.3 Software 215

Set this region as a rectangle which encompasses the entire DUT.

216 User Guide V21.3 Software

Save the completed CAD template to the library by pressing the ‘Save to library
button’.
Set a suitable Template name and press OK.

12.9.3. Importing an existing CAD template

Open the CAD Template Editor minitab

Press the ‘Import’ button

 User Guide V21.3 Software 217

Select the CAD file to import.

The Nordson DAGE software will support the following CAD files; Dage XML,
Autodesk DXF, Generic CSV and Comma separated TEXT files.
Rename the layers if required

Save the CAD Template to the library as previously described.

12.9.4. Creating a Template Based Analysis

Select the Template Based Analysis minitab.

Press the ‘Wizard’ button to start a new routine.

218 User Guide V21.3 Software

Enter a name for the new routine.

Press the ‘Import’ button and select the appropriate template CAD from the library.

Use the Browse button to select the

required text description file.
The text description file consists of text commands for what to identify and inspect.
An example for the DUT in this explanation would be;
FIND ROI(A+B+C+1+2+3)
VOID ROI(1) Pad1 10 65
VOID ROI(2) Pad2 10 65
VOID ROI(3) Pad3 10 65
 User Guide V21.3 Software 219

Once the text description file is loaded it will be displayed as below

Press the ‘Save’ button.

220 User Guide V21.3 Software

12.9.5. Selecting and Running the Template Based Analysis

The Template Based Analysis (TBA) can be run as a single automated inspection or
as part of an Automated Inspection Routine (AIR).
To run the TBA as a single automated inspection, ensure the DUT is displayed on
the Inspect screen and a suitable voltage and power are used to give a good
contrasting image.
Select the Template Based Analysis minitab.
Press the ‘Open Routine’ button and select the required routine.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 221

Press the ‘Run’ button.

Once the inspection has been completed a pop-up window will be displayed with the
option to view the HTML report, selected from the hyperlink.
222 User Guide V21.3 Software

The Template Based Analysis can be included as a step within an Automatic

Inspection Routine (see page 265).
 User Guide V21.3 Software 223

12.10. Deleting saved Auto routines

To delete any automation routines that are no longer required, open the Load
Routine window as previously described (see page 187).

Highlight the routine to be deleted and press .

If the routine is not visible ensure the relevant selection check boxes are checked.
It is also possible to delete routines from the Database Viewer (see page 355).
Care must be taken when deleting auto routines as these can be used in Automated
Inspection Routines (see page 265), and deletion may cause the AIR to stop
functioning correctly.
224 User Guide V21.3 Software
 225

13. X-Plane® Introduction

The X-Plane® capability of your Nordson DAGE x-ray inspection system uses a
proprietary tomosynthesis (CT) technique to generate a virtual 3D model from a
selected 2D field of view without the need to cut or destroy the sample. Once the 3D
model has been produced it can then be sliced in any 2D x-ray plane and viewed
and saved for analysis using the supplied X-Plane® viewer. Additionally, the 3D
model data set can be exported into a third party CT visualization software package
for the creation of rendered 3D views and other additional analysis. Nordson DAGE
can provide an additional visualization package if required.
The X-Plane® capability provides Nordson DAGE customers with the ability,
amongst others, to:
 Investigate the position and size of voids at joint interfaces and other locations
in BGA/CSP/QFN/LGA.
 Identify Head on Pillow (HoP) and open joints.
 Separate and inspect the different layers within a Package on Package (PoP) or
MCM.
 Remove obscuring detail caused by side 2 features when needing to inspect
side 1 components.
 Investigate the quality and fill of thru-hole joints & vias.
 Identify tilted components and warpage.
 Analyze complex connectors.
 Examine the tracks in each individual board layer.
 Investigate embedded components.
 Make virtual micro-sections.
The X-Plane® capability is a licensed option. Contact your Nordson DAGE representative for
further information.

13.1. X-Plane® Acquisition Screen

The X-Plane® Acquisition screen can be accessed by selecting the X-Plane®
Control minitab from the Inspect screen.
226 User Guide V21.3 Software

13.1.1. X-Plane® Screen

13.1.1.1. X-Plane® Parameters

 User Guide V21.3 Software 227

Inclination Angle allows the user to define the off axis angle to be used by the detector
for image acquisition. This can be set, by default, in 5 degree steps from 30° to 60°
from the drop down menu. It is also possible to type any angle between 1° and 60°
as required into the text field directly.
Number of projections allows the user to select the number of projections/images to be
acquired in a 360 degree rotation of the detector around the set Field of View. These
images will then be used for CT model reconstruction.
The higher the number of projections the better the model but at the expense of
increased time for acquisition.

This button defines for the software the position and height of the Remote
Fiducial position (see page 230).

This checkbox informs the software that a remote fiducial will be

used during acquisition. Refer to Remote Fiducial set-up (see page 230) for details.

Starts the acquisition process.

Stops the acquisition process.

This allows the user to select the folder for saving the acquisition and
reconstruction images to.
The project folder must be set prior to starting an acquisition.
If the same folder is used each time, the new acquisition images will overwrite the
existing ones.

13.1.1.2. Reconstruction
228 User Guide V21.3 Software

Slices Count is displayed purely for reference and is not user adjustable. This value
indicates the number of slices displayed in the z-axis in the model to cover the
thickness determined by the Z Step value.
Reconstruction Plane Offset allows the user to enter an offset in the number of slices to
the reference level defined using the "Set Height" feature. In this example, with the
offset at zero, there will be 120 slices above the reference level and 120 below.
For most acquisitions this should be left at zero and should only be adjusted when
the Region of Interest of the CT model is not covered by the reconstruction. In this
case, a new reconstruction can be made using the same images but using the new
reconstruction parameters.
The Number of Iterations to be used for reconstructing the CT model can be set by
entering a value between 1 and 10.
A higher number of Iterations will produce a better model but will take longer to
reconstruct.
Scale Projection is for reference only and is not user selectable.
Adjust Z Step allows the user to vary the thickness over which the slices count will
cover. This can be set from 0.1 up. Larger values will allow a larger thickness of the
sample to be covered but there will be greater separation between each slice.
As the Z Step value is adjusted, the thickness of the model covered by the slices will
be displayed in the text window. This value will also depend on the field of view
used.

A higher Z Step value means a greater thickness through the model but at the
expense of a greater separation between each slice.

The use of this button allows an off-line reconstruction of the acquired

images. This allows the user to make adjustments to any or all of the reconstruction
settings from the recently acquired image data set and then perform a
reconstruction without the need to acquire a complete new model.
If this button appears disabled then there are no suitable images in the project folder to
reconstruct.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 229

13.1.2. Fiducial
A Fiducial is one or more defined features that are required to produce the
reconstructed CT model.
There are two modes of Fiducial alignment available:
1. In-model Fiducial alignment
2. Remote Fiducial alignment.
1. In-model Fiducial alignment
This is suitable to use if the sample being viewed contains something with cylindrical
symmetry such as BGA balls or vias, etc. within the Field of View that will not be
obscured by other features during a full 360 degree rotation at the desired inclination
angle for the detector. The choice of which In-model Fiducial feature or features
used is defined during normal X-Plane® operation (see page 237).
Tip: Set the detector to the required angle of view using the angle control on the
measurement controls panel and perform a complete 360 degree rotation of the
Field of View to ensure the selected Fiducial is not obscured by something of equal,
or greater density.
2. Remote Fiducial alignment
This mode should be used if a suitable In-model Fiducial is not available. It uses a
feature outside of the sample field of view as the Fiducial feature. The remote
Fiducial is set-up in a separate operation prior to starting the image acquisition
feature (see page 230).
230 User Guide V21.3 Software

13.1.2.1. Remote Fiducial set-up

In order for the Remote Fiducial to function correctly, a Fiducial feature will need to
be placed in a clear space on the sample tray. In this example, a ball bearing has
been stuck to the sample tray. However, the Remote Fiducial could be another
non-obscured cylindrical symmetry object on the sample, for example, a via or
plated through hole.
Ensure the 'Use Remote Fiducial' checkbox has been selected.

Locate the remote fiducial feature to be used and center it on the Inspect Screen. In
this example, a ball bearing has been used.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 231

Use the normal 'Set Height' (see page 60) feature to set the reference
level of the Fiducial feature.
Once complete and before moving the sample manipulator, press the 'Set Remote

Fiducial' button, .
The Remote Fiducial position and relative level has now been set.

The 'Set Height' feature, , will subsequently need to be used again in order
to set the desired reference level of a selected feature in the field of view for image
acquisition. This will not change the calibrated position for the remote fiducial.

13.2. X-Plane® Viewer

Once the images have been acquired a CT model will automatically be

reconstructed using the parameters previously set in the 'Reconstruction' controls
(see page 227) and can be viewed in the X-Plane® Viewer. The viewer will be
automatically displayed after reconstruction has completed. The X-Plane® viewer
can also be accessed by the following menu bar sequence
[Menu][Screens][X-Plane].
232 User Guide V21.3 Software

13.2.1. Short Cut Keys

The model can be moved around on the screen by holding the Left Mouse button
down and dragging the image within the view area. Digital zoom within the
tomographic model can be adjusted by holding the 'Ctrl' key while holding the left
mouse button down. Then moving the mouse to the left decreases digital zoom and
moving the mouse to the right increases it.
Holding the 'Shift' key while holding the left mouse button down, allows movement
through the slices. Move the mouse to the left to move down through the slices and
right to move up.
Holding both ‘Ctrl’ and ‘Shift’ keys whilst holding the left mouse button and then
moving the mouse vertically or horizontally allows adjustment of the plane of view of
the X-Plane® slices. For example, when in the z-view, if an inspected device is
warped (tilted) with respect to a printed circuit board then the default X-Plane®
slices will be perpendicular to the board but not to the warped device. Using this
command sequence allows the plane of view to be adjusted so that the slices can
be made perpendicular to the device rather than the board for better analysis and/or
an indication of the warpage angle of the device relative to the board. Once the
plane of view has been changed then the full X-plane analysis is available in the
normal way on this revised planar view. Clicking on one of the view buttons (for
example the z) will return the slices to the original slice view.
When exporting the images for external CT visualization (see page 235) then the
data set will contain the currently visible planar orientation (if it has been modified
from the original) together with the any contrast adjustments and image
enhancements that have been applied.
The displayed view can be changed to any of the major axis by using the view
buttons.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 233

13.2.2. Histogram and Brightness/Contrast controls

Use of the histogram can improve the stretch contrast of the displayed image.

Clicking near the green line using the left mouse button will create a linear
modification spot. Clicking near this spot with the right mouse button will remove it
again. You can add as many modification spots as required.
The added points can be grabbed using the left mouse button and moved by
dragging the cursor around the histogram.
A pair of slider bars are available for the user to adjust both Brightness and Contrast
of the image.

Pressing the 'Reset' button will restore both sliders and any histogram adjustment to
the default position.

13.2.3. Live Contrast Stretching

There are two Stretch Contrast filters which can be applied to the image seen on the
X-Plane® Viewer.
234 User Guide V21.3 Software

 Linear - This will apply a standard stretch contrast using the minimum and
maximum gray levels in the image.
 Bright - This applies a stretch contrast using the minimum and maximum gray
levels in the image but emphasizes the bright areas. This can lose some of the
detail in the darker areas of the image.
Both live contrast stretch filters are dynamic and will modify the on-screen image
contrast automatically as the image varies through the displayed slices.
Only one live contrast stretch filter can be selected at a time.
The filters can be switched on by selecting the check box beneath the list box.

By hovering the cursor over the check box a tooltip description will be displayed for
a few seconds.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 235

13.2.4. Image Enhancement Filters

Image Enhancement Filters can be selected from the drop down list and are applied
to the image as soon as they are selected.

It is possible to create a filter pipeline by selecting filters from the drop down list and

clicking the 'Add Filter' button. The list of added filters will be displayed in
the order they are added in the text area below the buttons.

The last filter added can be removed by clicking the 'Remove Filter' button.
The entire filter pipeline can be removed by clicking the 'Remove All' button.

13.2.5. Model Import, Saving images and Exporting projections

The slices from a previous model can be imported back into the X-Plane® Viewer by

using the 'Import' button, , and navigating to the location of the saved
slices.
The current viewed image can be saved by pressing the 'Save Image' button.

.
It is possible to export all the reconstructed model slices as an Image Stack so they
can be used in third party visualization software by using the 'Export' button.

13.2.6. Video
The X-Plane® viewer can be used to create simple 'What You See Is What You Get'
videos by using the video controls at the top of the screen.

Operation of these controls is identical to that found in the standard NordsonDAGE

X-ray application software. Refer to Capturing video images (see page 347) for
further details.
236 User Guide V21.3 Software

13.2.7. Outline and Void Analysis

Outline and Void measurements can be made from within the X-Plane® Viewer
screen.

For the slice displayed on the X-Plane® Viewer screen, the outline of the device can
be identified and measurements made.
These measurements are for the single slice displayed only.
Refer to 'Measuring ball grid arrays (BGA) manually' (see page 115) and 'Measuring
die and general voids manually' (see page 145) for further details on how to use the
Outline and Void Analysis controls.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 237

13.3. X-Plane® Operation

Define the field of view to be used for analysis and, using the 'Set Height' feature

, set the appropriate reference level within the sample.

If a remote Fiducial alignment is required this will need to be set up before starting
the image acquisition, and the 'Use Remote Fiducial' checkbox will need to be
selected (see page 230).
Ensure the Frame Average is set to a value other than 'Live'. Between 16 and 128 is
a suggested setting. A higher frame average will produce a cleaner model by
improving the signal to noise ratio of the image but at the expense of time to
acquire.

Once this has been completed, or an In-model Fiducial is to be used, proceed as

follows:
1. Select the Project Folder to be used for storing the images acquired.

2. Select the required Inclination Angle from the drop down list or, if a different angle
from the list is required, enter the value directly into the text field.

Choosing a high Inclination Angle will normally produce a better model but could
also result in losing information through other components obscuring the Field of
View.
238 User Guide V21.3 Software

Tip: Set the detector to the required angle of view using the angle control on the
measurement controls panel and perform a complete 360 degree rotation of the
Field of View to ensure the selected Fiducial is not obscured by any other
components during rotation.
3. Select the required Number of Projections from the drop down list or enter it
directly into the text field.

The higher the number of projections selected the better the detail but the
acquisition time will increase.
4. Select the number of Iterations to be used for reconstruction.

The higher the number of iterations used the better the resultant model but at
the expense of increased time for reconstruction.
5. If a Remote Fiducial is required, ensure the check box has been selected

and continue from step 5 below. If an In-model Fiducial is to be

used, ensure the check box is deselected and continue from step 9
below.
6. Press the 'START' button.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 239

7. The routine will adjust the system manipulators to place the detector at the
desired inclination angle and move to the position previously set for the Remote
Fiducial (see page 230) feature.

8. The Fiducial feature now needs to be identified. This is done by drawing a

fiducial outline grid around the Fiducial feature, holding down the left mouse
button and drawing from the center of the Fiducial feature until it is completely
enclosed. Ensure the enclosing boundary is slightly larger than than the feature
being used.
Only a single feature can be used as a Remote Fiducial. Refer to Remote
Fiducial set-up (see page 230) for further information.
240 User Guide V21.3 Software

The Fiducial outline grid may need to be adjusted to ensure an accurate

alignment if the Fiducial is not centered within the red outline grid. Placing the
mouse cursor to either the left or right of the red outline grid and scrolling the
mouse wheel will move the red outline grid to the left or right outside of the
Fiducial feature. Placing the cursor above or below the red outline grid and
scrolling the mouse wheel will move the outline grid up or down.
If you have an incorrect alignment or wish to reposition the Fiducial then left
click within the red grid outline and redefine the new Fiducial in the normal way.

9. Proceed to step 11 below.

10. For an In-model Fiducial, the system will move to the selected angle only after

the 'Start' button has been pressed.

11. The In-model Fiducial approach allows for multiple Fiducials to be selected by
drawing around each one separately. Although one Fiducial may be sufficient,
additional Fiducials may be helpful when a single Fiducial might be obscured by
other components or features during the 360° image acquisition. The system will
monitor all the Fiducial features selected to ensure accurate reconstruction in
the same way as in step 7 above.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 241

Similar cylindrically symmetric features should be selected if using more than

one Fiducial.

The Fiducial outline grid may need to be adjusted to ensure an accurate

alignment if the Fiducial is not centered within the red outline grid. Placing the
mouse cursor to either the left or right outside of the red outline grid and
scrolling the mouse wheel will move the red outline grid to the left or right of the
Fiducial feature. Placing the cursor above or below the red outline grid and
scrolling the mouse wheel will move the outline grid up or down.
If you have an incorrect alignment or wish to reposition the Fiducial then left
click within the red grid outline and redefine the new Fiducial in the normal way.
The red outline grid will turn blue indicating it has been set when a second or
any subsequent Fiducial outline grid is defined. Reselecting a set Fiducial
outline grid by left mouse clicking it will delete the Fiducial.
12. Once all the Fiducials have been identified, press the 'NEXT' button.

13. The system will start to acquire images using the parameters set. Once the
image acquisition has been completed, reconstruction will commence
automatically. The progress will be displayed in the text window. Once
reconstruction has been completed, the model will be viewed automatically in
the X-Plane® Viewer.
242 User Guide V21.3 Software

14. The projection acquisition can be stopped at any time by pressing the 'Stop'
button.

During the image acquisition, a small window will be displayed below the
Reconstruction parameters.

This window will show the Fiducial feature selected as it is tracked during the 360°
image acquisition. In the case of several Fiducial features being selected, the best
feature at that particular orbital angle will be displayed. This allows the operator to
monitor the tracking of the Fiducial feature, or features, and to decide if the system
has been set up correctly without the need to wait for the complete model to be
reconstructed.
 243

14. Measurement Features

Select the Measurement mini-tab to access all of the measurement tools.

14.1. Positioning controls

The measurement screen has a number of controls to help in precise positioning of
the part. The actual display may differ in appearance, depending on what features
have been enabled in the More Options menu (see page 34).

Relative Positioning Absolute Positioning

An alignment cross representing the center of the image, which can be used to help
with precise positioning, can be switched on and off by using the Cross Hair button.

A complete grid can also be turned on and off, covering the whole image viewer
using the Grid button.

This grid will consist of different colors and will resize as the image is zoomed in and
out. Red lines are a matrix of 2mm, Yellow lines are 1mm and Green lines are
0.1mm grids. The smaller grid will disappear once a certain zoom level has been
exceeded.

14.1.1. Jog control

This control allows the part to be moved in precise increments.
The jog controls are provided in three groups of four arrows. Beneath each set of
arrows is a numerical value box.
244 User Guide V21.3 Software

1. Select µm or mm as the units.

Note: The term µm refers to micro-meters or micron.
2. Set the value for each of the groups as required by entering the value directly in
the text box beneath each set of jog controls.
3. Click on any of the four arrow keys to move the part in the required direction by
the specified distance.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 245

14.2. Oblique angle and Feature Height

There are two controls used to define the oblique angle view. The first sets the angle
of the detector, in degrees, from the vertical. The second defines the position that
the detector takes around the inspection point, in degrees. In the second control, 0
degrees is due East as you face the front of the system; 90 degrees is North; 180
degrees is West; etc. The settings defined numerically are reflected exactly in the
dartboard. A third control allows the height of the feature being inspected to be set.
Further explanation of this can be found in 'Setting the height (see page 60)'.

The 'dartboard' can still be used to adjust the angle of view as normal (see page 58).
The numbers displayed will reflect the current position, and can then be changed by
entering a new number or nudged by using the up/down buttons.
246 User Guide V21.3 Software

14.3. Current Location

The 'Current Location' display can be set to show either Absolute positions or
Relative positions based on the location of the mouse cursor.
The displayed option is set from the More Options menu (see page 34).

14.3.1. Absolute Position readout

When the Absolute Position option is selected from the More Options menu (see
page 34), the precise position of the center of the Inspect Screen is displayed in
millimeters. The datum, or zero-zero point, for this positioning is the front left hand
corner of the sample tray. This equates to the bottom left corner of the Navigation
Map as seen on the screen.

It is possible to type a specific X,Y location into each text field and then to drive the
sample tray to that position by pressing the 'Goto Position' button.

14.3.2. Relative Position readout

If the Absolute Position option is not selected, there are three sets of live readouts
displayed, in millimeters, based on the position of the mouse cursor over the image.
The readouts are:
 Offset from image
 Offset from scan
 Offset from graticule
The height of the part must be set in order to calibrate the measurements (see page
60).
Note: This display will be blank until the mouse is over the picture.
Offset from image
The offset from image value is the position of the mouse from the bottom-left corner
of the image.
Mouse position X Y
 User Guide V21.3 Software 247

Offset from scan

This is the position of the mouse from the bottom-left corner of the manipulator.
Mouse position X Y

Offset from graticule

This is the position of the mouse from the cross-hair (it must be turned on).
Mouse position X Y
248 User Guide V21.3 Software

14.4. Measuring point-to-point (distance)

This feature enables point to point measurements to be made on the part under
inspection.
The two points can be located anywhere within the machine’s working area.
The machine will show the horizontal (X), vertical (Y) and point to point (true)
distance.
1. Select the Measurement mini-tab and choose Distance from the drop down list.

2. Press the Measure button if it has not already been activated (The green lamp
will be illuminated.).
Move to the first point to be measured. Use of the Cross Hair is recommended for
accuracy

Note: For precise alignment, zoom in on the part.

3. Click the Zero button to zero the position indicator when the first point is aligned.
4. Move to the second point, aligning it in the same way as the first.

The machine displays the vertical (Y), horizontal (X) and point to point (true)
distance between the two points.
Note: This measurement is independent of the height of the sample. It counts the
number of steps the motors have moved as the sample is moved in the X and Y
directions. However, it requires that the Z-height is not changed between the
start and end points of the measurements.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 249

The X and Y Distance is also displayed as an overlay on the Image along with the
actual length between the start and finish points.

The text color and position on the screen can be set from the More Options menu
(see page 34).

14.5. Making distance and angle measurements

This tool makes point-to-point measurements on-screen, and can be used without
mechanically moving the part.
However, both ends of the measurement must be on the screen at the same time.
Note: The height must be set for correct calibration (see page 60).
1. Select the Measurement mini-tab and choose Distance (mm) and angle from the drop
down list.

2. The Measure button will be activated automatically (The green LED will be
illuminated.).
3. Click the mouse pointer on one of the end points of the distance to be
measured. Then click on the second end point.
4. If a mistake is made, click the Cancel button. This will remove the last
measurement made.
250 User Guide V21.3 Software

The distance and angle of the part are displayed as shown in the example
below.

Step 3 can be repeated as many times as necessary so as to make multiple

measurements on the same image. Saving the image will store the measured
data as part of the image (see page 108).
Note: The angle provided is the angle made between the two measurement
points relative to the frame of the image.
5. Click the Measure button again to clear the measurement(s).
The color of the text and measurement lines can be set from the More Options
menu (see page 34).

14.6. Distance Only (mm) measurements

This tool makes point-to-point measurements on-screen, and can be used without
mechanically moving the part.
However, both ends of the measurement must be on the screen at the same time.
Note: The height must be set for correct calibration (see page 60).
This method of measurement works in the same way as the Distance and Angle
measuring tool but only displays the distance between the two defined points.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 251

The measurement displayed is the direct straight line distance between the two
points.

The Text and Line color can be set from the More Options menu (see page 34).

14.7. Measuring wire sweep

This feature is designed to measure the percentage bend in bond wires.
1. Check the detector setting in the 'dartboard' is as shown with the red cross in
the center.

2. Select the Measurement mini-tab and select Wire sweep from the drop down list.

3. Align the part so that all of the wires to be measured can be seen.
4. The Measure button will be activated automatically (The green LED will be
illuminated.).
252 User Guide V21.3 Software

5. Point to the start point of a wire and click the left button.
6. Point to the end point of the same wire and click the left button.
7. Select the point of greatest bend and click the left button.
The percentage wire sweep is displayed as shown in the example below.

A straight line is drawn from the start to end point and perpendicular to the
maximum bend point.
The ratio of these measurements is shown as a percentage near the wire.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 253

8. Repeat this as many times as required. All of the measurements are retained on
the screen.

Saving the image will store the measured data as part of the image (see page
108).
9. If a mistake is made in selecting the points of a single wire, click the Cancel
button. This will remove the last measurement points defined.
10. Click the Measure button a second time to clear all of the measurements.

14.8. Perpendicular Measurement

This feature is designed to measure the perpendicular distance between a set
reference line and a set feature.
For accurate measurements the feature height must be set (see page 60) and the
sample must be viewed from directly above.
1. Select the Measurement minitab.
254 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Select Perpendicular distance from the drop down list.

3. Adjust the image so the whole part to be measured can be seen on the image
viewer.
4. The measure button will have been activated automatically. This is indicated by
the LED turning green.

5. On the image viewer, select the first point of the reference line, as directed in
the message box.

6. Select the end point of the reference line. A straight line will be drawn linking the
two points and an instruction will be displayed asking for the perpendicular point
to be identified.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 255

7. A perpendicular line will be drawn from the reference line to the identified point.
A line parallel to the reference line will also be drawn and the distance between
the two lines will be shown on the screen.

8. Several measurements can be made on screen at the same time.

9. If a mistake is made the last set of measurements drawn can be removed by
selecting the Cancel button.
10. Click the Measure button a second time to remove all of the measurements. The
LED will turn gray.

14.9. 2x Perpendicular Measurement

This feature is designed to measure the perpendicular ratio between a set reference
line and two set features.
For accurate measurements the feature height must be set (see page 60) and the
sample must be viewed from directly above.
1. Select the Measurement minitab.

2. Select Perpendicular distance from the drop down list.

256 User Guide V21.3 Software

3. Adjust the image so the whole part to be measured can be seen on the image
viewer.
4. The measure button will have been activated automatically. This is indicated by
the LED turning green.

5. On the image viewer, select the first point of the reference line, as directed in
the message box.

Instructions will be displayed in the message box.

6. Select the end point of the reference line. A straight line will be drawn linking the
two points,

and an instruction will be displayed asking for the perpendicular point to be

identified.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 257

7. A perpendicular line will be drawn from the reference line to the identified point.
A line parallel to the reference line will also be drawn,

and an instruction for a second point to be identified will be displayed.

8. A perpendicular line will be drawn from the reference line to the second
identified point. A line parallel to the reference line will also be drawn,

and the ratio of the two distances from the reference line will be displayed.
The ratio will always be the shortest distance as a percentage of the longest.
9. Several measurements can be made on screen at the same time.
10. If a mistake is made the last set of measurements drawn can be removed by
selecting the Cancel button.
258 User Guide V21.3 Software

11. Click the Measure button a second time to remove all of the measurements. The
LED will turn gray.

14.10. Pixel graph

The Pixel graph method of measurement enables the user to obtain a Grayscale Plot
across a section of the image.
It is used as follows.
1. Select the Measurement mini-tab.
2. Select Pixel Graph from the drop down menu.

3. The Measure button will be activated automatically (The green LED will be
illuminated.).
A message will be displayed asking the user to Click on the start position.
4. Do this and then click on the end position.
A grayscale plot of the image between the two points will be displayed.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 259

5. Use the Menu on the plot to Print, stretch the Brightness, select to display the
X-axis in either Distance (mm) or Distance (pixels), Save or Exit the display.

14.11. Alternate measurement access

An alternative method of accessing the measurement features is to right mouse click
anywhere in the image viewer. This will bring up a menu option.
260 User Guide V21.3 Software

Selecting Measure will display a second menu. Select the required measurement
style and continue as previously described.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 261

15. Through-hole percentage fill analysis

Through-hole fill analysis enables the user to non-destructively examine and
calculate the percentage of solder material contained within a particular joint of a
through-hole component. In this way, non-destructive confirmation is available of
acceptable through-hole production quality, for example to meet IPC 610-E
guidelines.
This function allows you to design cursors that can be used as an overlay on the
image. A cursor enables operators to judge the solder fill of via holes more
accurately.
Saving the image will store the through-hole fill percentage data as part of the image
(see page 108).
Create a cursor
Create a cursor as follows.
1. Select the Automatic inspection tab and then click the Cursor mini-tab.

2. Enter a name for the cursor and press Enter on the keyboard.
The system will set default values for the Via Hole Height and Via hole diameter
based on the current magnification. These values should be changed to match
the size of the hole.

3. Set the height (see page 60) to a point approximately in the middle of the
through-hole to ensure the cursor dimensions match the selected values. Users
may find it easier to use the alternative method for set-height in order to find the
center of the through hole as this will tilt the detector.
This is important for the dimensions to be accurate.
4. View the hole at an oblique view to verify the dimensions.
262 User Guide V21.3 Software

5. Use the dartboard to change the angle of view.

An image similar to that below should be displayed.

Whilst the pattern cursor tab remains visible, the pattern cursors will remain
on-screen. Changing the oblique angle and/or altering the magnification used
will make the software automatically adjust the pattern cursors so as to be
aligned and proportionate to the new view settings. However, some manual
adjustment of the through hole may be necessary to perfectly re-align the
pattern cursors.
6. Choose the either Perspective or Orthographic Drawing type.

Orthographic will display the Pattern Cursor with parallel lines.

Perspective will display the Pattern Cursor in a 3D view, which can be useful to
the operator when viewing a long Via, for example.
7. Each cursor is created with 0% and 100% markers by default, and these are
shown in the marker details window.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 263

You can view or hide the details of a marker by clicking the relevant +/- box, or
by double-clicking the % marker.
Any number of markers at different fill percentages can be added.
8. To add further markers, click the Add button one or more times.

The markers will be added to the image, all with a default color (green) and %
value (50%).
9. To set an inspection marker color, double-click the Click to change color box.

In the color picker that appears, choose the required color and click OK.
The marker drawn over the image will update automatically.
10. To set an inspection marker position, select the Percent value of the marker and
enter the new value. The value to be changed needs to be highlighted first with
a single left mouse click, then selected with a second single left mouse click.
The cursor will be redrawn at the appropriate location.

11. To display or hide the percentage label for a marker, double click the relevant
Show number on screen? item. The item value will toggle between Yes and No.

12. Click the Save button to save the cursor.

Delete a marker
1. In the list of markers, select the one you wish to delete by clicking relevant %
marker.
2. Click the Delete button.
264 User Guide V21.3 Software
 265

16. Making automatic inspections

The standard Nordson DAGE software makes it possible to record a sequence of
unique inspection steps that can be re-played at any time. This is particularly useful
when it is necessary to make frequent inspections of large quantities of the same
product, for example, when needed as part of production quality control.
It may be helpful to consider the whole automated inspection routine as a roll of film
where every frame is equivalent to a unique position, view and possibly an
automated measurement, within the product under test.
Several identical products can be sequentially inspected in one inspection routine,
providing they all fit within the system inspection area. Furthermore, where each
product contains one, or more, identical sub-units then these can also be inspected
in a single routine. For example, the inspection of a PCB panel containing a number
of identical board images, or inspecting a strip, or strips, with several semiconductor
devices in each one.
The Automatic Inspection Routine Wizard is provided to enable easy configuring of
such routines. The wizard very simply creates a layout template that defines how
many boards, which might also be called products; units; panels; strips, etc., are on
the sample tray for each inspection run and how many patterns, which might also be
called sub-units, images, devices, etc. that each board contains. Once this layout
template has been defined, the user only has to create an inspection sequence for
the first pattern of the first board and that same inspection sequence will be applied
to all of the individual items in the layout. This can be achieved without the need for
complex programming and debugging and any subsequent modification made to the
original inspection sequence will be applied automatically to all identical objects.
The Automatic Inspection Routine (AIR) is created using a 'golden sample' as a
reference for all inspection criteria.
Note: Throughout this description the term board will always refer to the largest
repeated sample object for inspection and the term pattern will refer to repeated
objects occurring within a board.
266 User Guide V21.3 Software

In the example above there are six identical boards on the sample holder placed in
two rows of three boards. Each board (1) contains two identical patterns (2). During
the layout creation for this arrangement, it is only necessary to define, by mouse
drag, the area of the first board and the first pattern. The position of additional
boards and patterns are then simply defined by double-clicking, with the left mouse
button, on the bottom left-hand corner of the additional objects as they are shown on
a navigation map or defined using the matrix dimensions.
Boards which have two patterns that are identical but are rotated by 180 degrees to
each other must be treated as a single item and the inspection points on each
pattern will have to be uniquely identified in the AIR as the inspection point for
pattern A cannot be used with a rotation function applied for pattern B.
Once the layout has been defined, the user then proceeds to define the inspection
steps that they wish to use for analysis. In the above example, this means:
 Move to the first desired inspection location on the left hand pattern of the lower
left board.
 Define the type of view (or automated measurement) that is required at this
point.
 Record this inspection step into the automated sequence.
 Move to the next inspection position.
 Repeat the above as many times as necessary to capture all the required
inspection steps for that product.
Every inspection sequence that is then created for this pattern will be repeated
automatically for every other pattern in all the other boards.
Each inspection step can be any of the following functions.
 Manual pass/fail analysis against a reference image shown on-screen, which
allows the operator to grade failures (see page 311), if required.
 Automatic image capture. (see page 315)
 Automated BGA measurement (see page 159).
 Automated area void measurement (see page 159).
 Automated wire sweep (see page 171).
 Automated QFN measurements. (see page 175)
 Automated Pad Analysis measurements. (see page 183)
 Orbit rotation. (see page 310)
 Through-hole calculation. (see page 261)
 Additional fiducial alignment (see page 270).
An automated inspection routine can be constructed by using any, or all, of these
functions, either singly or repeatedly, in any order and in any combination.
Note: At each inspection step, the position on the sample, the magnification used,
the oblique angle used, the tube power, the tube kV, the frame average used, the
contrast stretch applied and any image enhancement can all be set differently to suit
the inspection requirements for that inspection location.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 267

At the completion of an automated inspection routine, the system can provide an

HTML report of the results (see page 323). This report includes a navigation map of
the product(s) with the location of any failures clearly highlighted, the full results of
any automated measurements and details of the inspection time, date, product
name and serial number and operator name.

16.1. Inspecting die, BGA and general voids automatically

16.1.1. Part location and alignment
The parts to be inspected should be located with a customized sample holder.
There are two methods of alignment that can be used within inspection routines:
manual alignment and automatic fiducial alignment. The inspection wizard that is
used to generate automatic inspection routines requires that a board has at least
one alignment point.

16.1.1.1. Product alignment points

However carefully the board is located, it is sometimes necessary to make some
adjustment of the inspection positions to compensate for some differences in the
position of the product.
For example a printed circuit board may be located in the machine by use of tooling
pins or by simple reference edges.
However, there is usually a tolerance between these and the copper layers which
typically reference the items of inspection.
If this tolerance is acceptable at the highest magnification being used, then no
alignment points will be required.

Item Description
1 Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
2 Copper feature
3 Tooling pin hole
268 User Guide V21.3 Software

4 Tooling pin
5 Sample holder

Dimension Tolerance
Tooling hole to copper ± 0.15mm
tolerance
Clearance of tooling pin ± 0.05mm
Total location accuracy ± 0.20mm
Highest magnification view 5mm (approx. 5um resolution)
Therefore tooling error 0.20/5.0*100%
represents = 4% movement of object - OK

If the highest magnification was instead 0.5mm, then the tooling error could move
the part 40% of the field of view. This would probably be unacceptable and
alignment points would be required.
Note: There can be more than one alignment step in the sequence. In fact any
inspection point can be used to reference the product datum point by correcting the
error and pressing the re-datum button (1).
 User Guide V21.3 Software 269

16.1.1.2. Manual Product Alignment

A board must have at least one dedicated alignment point. This is because the
software needs to confirm the location of each new item for inspection in relation to
the reference sample upon which the routine was created. This can be achieved
through a manual 1-point alignment, or an automatic 2-point, contrast-based, fiducial
alignment (see page 270).
Manual alignment works by providing the operator with an on-screen reference
image with a location cross. The operator compares this image to that of the current
product seen in the main X-ray image. During the creation of the automated
inspection routine, the manual alignment position should be carefully chosen, using
position, magnification, kV, power, etc., so as to provide an easily identifiable
feature, located in an easily reproducible position – the cross is located through the
middle of the hole.

Should there be any positional difference between the reference image and the
current product under test, the operator can move the X-ray image on-screen, using
the mouse, until its appearance coincides with that of the reference image. The
system will remember the X and Y movement the sample manipulator has made to
achieve this. The operator can then click the Re-datum button (1) and the off-set
made in the X and Y directions will then be automatically applied to every point in
the automated inspection routine for that inspection run only. In this way, any
modest misalignment of repeat sample tests can be easily accommodated.

Note: Using a customized sample holder may well provide a robust practical solution
to ensuring good repeat sample positioning.
270 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.1.1.3. Automatic fiducial alignment

Nordson DAGE software provides the ability to automatically adjust for misalignment
of parts by the use of fiducial alignment. There are two types of fiducial alignment:
 Location
 Rotation
Location fiducial alignment
Location contrast-based (not optically-based) fiducial steps will correct for an XY
displacement of the part.
Rotation fiducial alignment
A rotation fiducial will correct for a rotation of the part. A rotation fiducial requires
that a location fiducial has already been created for the rotation to be correctly
calculated.
Both types of fiducial alignment consist of a position and a reference area. The
reference area is a unique area (in terms of contrast variation) within the current
X-ray view.
When a fiducial step is used during an inspection routine, the software locates the
reference area using pattern recognition techniques and determines its current
location.
For a location fiducial the software then calculates the difference between the
current location and the original location and generates an offset that is then applied
to all subsequent steps of the routine. Rotation fiducial steps perform a similar
calculation but also use the previous location fiducial to calculate a difference in
rotation.
Note: Rotation fiducial steps will only correct positional errors caused by rotation of
the part, the live image will still appear at an angle.

Teaching a fiducial
A fiducial is created using the fiducial window. This window will be displayed
automatically on-screen during the inspection wizard process if fiducial alignment is
chosen. It can be manually displayed by choosing to add a fiducial step in the
routine editor. (see page 299)
Create a fiducial as follows.
1. Draw an outline around an area on the X-ray image by holding down the left
mouse button and moving the mouse.
The ideal is to define a unique area of contrast variation (not optical variation)
within the image that the system can use to define its position in the future.
2. Once the desired area has been defined, the software will automatically
calculate and display on the X-ray image and in the fiducial window if the
contrast variation contained within the defined area matches with any other
similarly sized areas in the image.
3. Click on Set the Template button, if the object is unique, i.e. the next best match
has a correlation probability of less than 80%, and this saves the current
selection for use.
4. Should creating a unique fiducial area not be possible in the current X-ray
image, click the Move button.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 271

This will enable moving the image by use of the mouse.

5. Move the image, and /or change the magnification, so that there is a greater
contrast variation in view.
6. Click the Draw button to re-enable drawing mode and repeat steps 1-3 until,
ideally, a unique fiducial area is achieved or subsequent matches are less than
80%.

16.2. Overview of features

16.2.1. Practical suggestions
Although the tube settings can be changed for each inspection step, it may be
beneficial to avoid changing the tube voltage or power too frequently unless it is
absolutely necessary. This is because it takes the tube a finite time to adjust its
settings and this will slow the speed of the inspection sequence.
Using the contrast stretch function may be adequate to highlight the desired features
instead of changing the tube settings. In addition, taking many frame averages for
each image will increase inspection time.
Setting a value of 32 frames, or less, is often usually sufficient for analysis, unless
the contrast is particularly low. However, if it is necessary to change the tube
conditions within an inspection sequence then consider grouping all of these
inspection points together in a continuous sequence.
272 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.2.2. Top level Automatic Inspection Routine Controls

All of the Automatic Inspection Routine (AIR) controls are contained within one
mini-tab located on the Inspect tab.
This Automatic Inspection Routines mini-tab comprises six top level functions and a
collection of five further mini-tabs that provide more detailed functionality.
The name of the currently loaded routine is displayed next to the title.
Note: Move the mouse over the button and a tool tip will be displayed. The tool tip
describes the button's function.

The six top-level controls are:

 Save or copy the current routine (see page 272)
 Open a program (see page 273)
 Choose program(s) to delete (see page 274)
 Automated Inspection Routine wizard (see page 276)
 Cross-hairs (see page 276)
 Navigation map (see page 276)
The other tabs are:
 Run Automatic Inspection Routine (see page 276)
 View past inspection results (see page 277)
 Create / edit inspection steps within an automated routine (see page 277)
 Configure the way inspection routines are run and reported (see page 278)
 Pattern cursors (for through-hole percentage fill analysis) (see page 261)

16.2.2.1. Save or copy current routine

Use the Save button to:
 Save the current routine
 Save the current routine under a different name
 Create a copy of the current routine to use as a base for a new pattern
 User Guide V21.3 Software 273

When the button is clicked the Save...as dialog box is displayed. The new name for
the routine should be typed in to the name field.

1. Use the Create a copy option to create a copy of the current pattern, choose a
unique filename or overwrite an existing file, and then click OK.
2. The Automatic Inspection Routine can be exported for use on a different
system, by checking the XML option. This will allow the AIR to be saved in *.xml
format. Refer to 'Importing and Using CAD Data' (see page 343) for further
information.
3. Similar Automatic Inspection Routines can be grouped together in a common
folder. Use the 'New folder' button to create the folder. Existing routines can
then be dragged into the folder from within the 'Save existing pattern as'
window.

16.2.2.2. Open a program

1. Click on the Open program button

The Choose Program dialog box is displayed.

274 User Guide V21.3 Software

This allows you to select the specific routine to be loaded.

Select the required routine by double clicking the routine name or typing the
name in the text field.

16.2.2.3. Choose program(s) to delete

1. Use the Choose program(s) to delete button to delete one or more existing routines.

The Delete Program dialog box will be displayed.

 User Guide V21.3 Software 275

Note: This option will also delete all associated reference images.

2. Select the routine(s) to be deleted by clicking on the item.

3. Press and hold the shift key, then click on the relevant items for multiple
selections.
4. Click OK. A message will be displayed similar to the one below.

5. Select Yes to confirm deletion should take place.

276 User Guide V21.3 Software

6. Routines can also be deleted by highlighting the routine name and pressing
Delete from either the Open Program or Save As windows. A warning window
will be displayed to confirm deletion.

16.2.2.4. Automated Inspection Routine Wizard

This button starts the wizard for creating Automatic Inspection Routines.

Refer to Creating a new routine for more details on the wizard.

16.2.2.5. Cross-hairs
The Cross Hairs button toggles the display of the cross-hairs on the main image. The
cross-hairs are particularly useful to aid manual alignment of parts during inspection
routines.

16.2.2.6. Navigation map

This button toggles between the navigation map and the live image for the routine
selected.

16.2.2.7. Import CAD file

The CAD button allows the user to import an existing CAD file to aid with creating an
AIR.

The CAD data must be in XML format. Refer to Importing and Using CAD Data (see
page 343) for more details.

16.2.2.8. Run Automatic Inspection Routine

Select this mini-tab to display the controls required to run inspection sequences.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 277

16.2.2.9. View past inspection results

Select this mini-tab to display the controls for selecting and viewing previous results
for the currently loaded routine.

16.2.2.10. Create / Edit inspection steps within an automated routine

Select this mini-tab to edit the currently loaded routine.
278 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.2.2.11. Configuring the way patterns are run and reported

Select this mini-tab to configure the way that all routines will be run and what data
will be captured and presented in the report. The options that are available are:

The Options screen allows the following options to be set.

Item Sets
1 A reference image for each step created.
2 Routines will only be run if a serial number for the part is entered.
3 Edit the Failure Codes. See Editing Failure Codes. (see page 314)
4 Shows the 'Enter Grade' screen when a step is passed.
5 Saves an image when a step is passed or failed by the operator
pressing a grading key.
6 Forces a manual result or grade when a step is failed and option to
save an image. Only allows configured failure codes.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 279

7 Sets the automatic saving of images and the generation of results.

Always Always saves and generates images and reports.
Only if serial Only saves and generates images and reports if a
no. entered serial number is entered.
8 Generates an automatic serial number if none entered.
9 Turns off the X-rays once the AIR has completed.
10 Sets what images are to be saved with the report.
Fails only Only images of failed steps are stored.
Passes only Only images for passed steps are stored.
All All images are stored.
11 Includes the navigation map with the report
12 Allows selection of the location to store reports. Click the browse
button to browse to the required directory

16.2.3. Operator reference image and prompts

When recording the inspection sequence, the current X-ray image is usually
automatically saved as a reference image that is then presented to the operator as a
guide. During the running of a routine, the reference image can be magnified and
scrolled by using the mouse to drag the image and the mouse wheel, or scroll bar,
to change the magnification.

In some applications this default reference image may be inappropriate, or

misleading, to the operator. In which case, the reference image can be cleared or an
alternative reference image can be assigned (see page 298).
In addition, it is possible to add a text prompt with instructions to the operator of
what is required at this particular inspection step. (see page 298)
280 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.2.4. Operator grading and viewing options

When recording an inspection step, it may be necessary to force the operator to
grade that inspection location with a Pass or Fail judgment.
Enable grading as follows.
1. Select the Grade Required box.

This forces the operator to pass or fail the inspection point by using the tick or
cross buttons (1).

2. If the inspection point is a fail, after clicking the cross button, the operator can
optionally:
 Assign a grade code, usually a number between 0 - 9, that has been locally
designated to indicate different types of failure mode.
 Enter comments to provide additional information within the final report.
 As an alternative to pressing the tick or cross buttons during the inspection,
the operator may instead press Enter on the keyboard to designate a Pass, or
a numeric key between 0 - 9 to indicate a particular grade code failure. This
speeds up inspection throughput but at the expense of the ability to assign
additional comment.
 Save the image.
All of this data appears in the inspection report, which can be generated at the
end of the inspection sequence.
The grade codes are also saved in a database for later analysis and are
referenced by product (inspection routine), name, and serial number.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 281

16.3. Recording or editing an Automated Inspection Routine

Before starting, the sample holder may need to be customized to provide a
repeatable location for the product. (see page 46)
In addition, a recipe should be chosen that allows as many, preferably all, of the
inspection points to be covered. Refer to Manually adjusting the settings (see page
85) or Image recipes (see page 66).
The product should be fixed into the machine, the recipe selected and X-rays turned
on.
All of the controls are chosen by selecting Inspect screen main tab and then the
Automatic Inspections Routines mini-tab.

The record/edit tab is one of the five options available previously described in run
automatic inspection routine (see page 276) and pattern cursors. (see page 261)

16.3.1. Creating a new routine using the Automatic Inspection Routine (AIR) wizard
1. Click the Automation Wizard button to start the wizard.

Note: The system will display the first step of the wizard along with prompting
text. The step numbers that will be displayed during the wizard will increase in
value but may not always be sequential. This is quite normal and reflects the
choices made during the wizard.
282 User Guide V21.3 Software

This will display the screen below.

Current Map will only be an option if a valid Scan Map (see page 52) has already
been completed.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 283

In order to help in understanding what the wizard is intended for, consider the
example below. There are six identical boards on the sample holder, placed in
two rows of three boards (1). Each board contains two identical patterns (2) and
all items must be inspected in one automated routine.

2. Clicking the Advance button moves the wizard on to the next step.

3. Clicking the Stop button at any time will halt the wizard.

Choose map type

The wizard uses a large version of the navigation map to configure the layout of the
test samples on the sample holder. It also provides other functions:
 Indicates the location of any failures found during an automated inspection.
 Provides the navigation map in large view on-screen when the operator is about
to load the samples, so as to encourage correct sample orientation and
placement.
 Overwrites any existing navigation map when the routine is loaded, which
means that the navigation map does not have to be re-created from the start
every time that routine is to be used.
Therefore, a navigation map must be created for each routine. Step 1 provides the
engineer with a choice of performing a single board scan, a full scan and the option
to use the current map.
Perform the following actions.
1. Select the desired map option.
284 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Enter the name for this routine, for example the product name.
3. Click the Advance button.

Once the Advance button has been pressed the software will perform the
requested board scan, if selected, and the navigation map will be created over
the main X-ray image section of the image display before proceeding to the next
step.
Note: If the current map option is chosen the system will not perform a board
scan and the next step will appear. Pressing the navigation map button (see
page 276) will toggle the main X-ray image view between the live X-ray image
and the navigation map. Consider selecting the best X-ray tube settings to
provide the most suitable navigation map before commencing the wizard. The
resolution of the navigation map is not the same as the live X-ray image.
If the name entered is already in use, the following message is displayed.

If Yes is selected, the software will continue.

If No is selected, the software will step back to the start of step 1.
If a Current Map does not exist then the option to use one will be unavailable
forcing either a Single Board Map or Full Scan

16.3.1.1. Select auto-advance option

Routines can be configured to automatically advance between inspection steps after
a user defined delay, even if they are a manual step that would normally wait for an
operator to confirm a pass or fail. This can be particularly useful for routines that
wish to be used to generate reports for off-line evaluation. In addition, this approach
could be considered for a tray of devices, for example. The routine will step on and
report a pass automatically at every inspection step unless the operator presses a
grade code (failure) key when they see a failure. This will log the failure and then
continue with automatic passes until the next failure is observed.
1. Choose either the Manual or Auto advance after option.
2. Enter the required delay interval, if Auto advance after was chosen.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 285

3. Click the Advance button to proceed to the next step.

Note: This is a default setting that will be applied to every inspection step in the
subsequent routine. However, when creating the individual inspection steps, any
of them can be changed to the other option locally.

16.3.1.2. Define number of boards and patterns

This screen will be displayed.

1. Enter a value in the Num. Boards box to define the boards to be inspected in the
routine.
For the example previously given, this would be 6.
2. Enter a value in the Num. Patterns box to define the number of patterns to be
inspected within each board.
For the example previously given, this would be 2.
286 User Guide V21.3 Software

3. Select the Serial number for each program option if it is required that the results and
reports of the inspection routine are to be associated with a serial number for
each time the program is run. A unique serial number for each program will be
requested every time the routine is run. It is possible to create a single program
which contains multiple boards each containing multiple patterns.
4. Select the Serial number for each board option if it is required that the results and
reports of the inspection routine are to be associated with a serial number on
each board. This may be in addition to, or instead of, the serial number of the
relevant program. A unique serial number for each board will be requested
every time the routine is run.
5. Select the Serial number for each pattern option if it is required that the results and
reports of the inspection routine are to be associated with a serial number on
each pattern. This may be in addition to, or instead of, the serial number of the
relevant pattern and/or board. A unique serial number for each pattern will be
requested every time the routine is run.
6. Click the Advance button to proceed to the next step.
If a serial number is already stored within the results database the software will ask
if it is ok to overwrite the existing results at the time of program execution.

16.3.1.3. Define board outline

This screen will be displayed.

1. Click and drag on the large navigation map, to draw an outline around the board
located in the bottom left-hand corner of the image.
2. Click and edit the Board Name field as required. For example, panel 1.
3. Click the Advance button to proceed to the next step.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 287

16.3.1.4. Define board layout method

The board defined should now have a blue outline indicating it is the source board.

The next step in the creation process is to define the positions of the other boards
on the sample holder.
There are two methods that can be used to position the remaining boards.
 Manually position boards
 Insert matrix of Boards
Proceed as follows.
1. Choose the required option.
2. Click the Advance button to proceed to the next step.
288 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.3.1.5. Manual board layout

This screen will be displayed.

Manually position the remaining boards as follows.

1. Select the board to position by clicking on the board in the list.
2. Click on the name and type new information, if the name of the board is to be
different from the default. For example, panel 2.
3. Double left-click on the large navigation map at the position of the bottom
left-hand corner of the board being defined. An outline of the same size as the
source board will then be drawn and outlined in green around this second
board. The associated icon in the list will change from a red cross to a green
tick.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 289

Note: The boards do not have to be assigned in a specific order with this
approach. The second board does not necessarily have to be next to the first,
for example, but can be elsewhere on the sample holder.
4. If the position of this, or any other subsequent board, is not where it is required,
then re-select the board in question from the list and repeat step 3.
5. Click the Advance button to proceed to the next step. This will become available
only when all of the boards have been positioned.

16.3.1.6. Matrix board layout

Position the remaining boards as follows.

1. Enter the number or rows of boards, 2 in the example.
2. Enter the number of columns of boards, 3 in the example.
290 User Guide V21.3 Software

3. Enter the X pitch (1), the horizontal distance in millimeters between the origin of
the source board and the origin of the next board to its right on the sample
holder.
4. Enter the Y pitch (2), the vertical distance in millimeters between the origin of
the source board and the origin of the next board immediately above the sample
holder.

5. Click the Advance button to proceed to the next step.

Note: The system will automatically number and define the placement of the
boards in this method. It will go across the columns before going up the rows on
the sample holder.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 291

16.3.1.7. Choose the alignment method

Choose the alignment method to be used for each board.

There are two choices:
 Manual alignment
 Fiducial alignment method
A full description of the operation of these two alignment methods is given in part
location and alignment. (see page 267)
1. Click the Advance button once the choice has been made to proceed with
creating the alignment steps.

16.3.1.8. Manual alignment

If manual alignment is selected, the system will move to show the bottom left-hand
corner of the first, or source, board in the main X-ray image. The cross-hairs will be
automatically turned on to aid with alignment.
1. Drag the X-ray image so that the cross-hairs are positioned over a reference
feature that will allow for easy realignment on subsequent boards.
2. Once a satisfactory alignment position has been selected, click the Advance
button to save this view as an alignment step for the source board.
This same alignment step will be then automatically added as the alignment
step for each subsequent board.
Once the Advance button has been pressed, and if there is only one pattern in the
board, the wizard will finish and the Inspection Wizard Finished message will be
displayed. It is assumed in this case that the pattern will have the same outline as
the board. If there is more than one pattern in the board, the wizard will advance to
the next step.
292 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.3.1.9. Fiducial alignment

If fiducial alignment is selected, the system will move to show the bottom left-hand
corner of the first source board in the main X-ray image and display the fiducial
screen (see page 270). You will need to define and save, first the location fiducial
and then the rotational fiducial.
Although the X-ray image can be moved where there is insufficient contrast detail to
allow a unique fiducial to be acquired, wherever possible, try and keep the location
fiducial as close as possible to the board origin.
Once the location fiducial has been saved, the system will automatically move to the
top right hand corner of the source board where the rotation fiducial should be
created and saved. (see page 270) For the best results, try and keep the rotation
fiducial location as close to the top right hand corner as possible.
Once both fiducial points have been satisfactory defined, and, if there is only a
single pattern for each board, the system will:
 Finish the wizard.
 Save these views as alignment steps for the source board.
 Display the Inspection Wizard Finished message.
These same alignment steps will be then automatically added as alignment steps for
each subsequent board. It is assumed in this case that the pattern will have the
same outline as the board. If there is more than one ‘pattern’ in the board, the
wizard will advance to the next step.

16.3.1.10. Define pattern outline

1. Define the outline of the bottom left-hand pattern on the board.

 User Guide V21.3 Software 293

This is achieved by clicking and dragging on the navigation map around the
outline of the first pattern. A red box will then outline this pattern.

Note: Sometimes ‘patterns’ can be laid out as mirror images on the board. In this
case, the mirror images must be treated as if they are two different patterns
within the software.
2. Click the Advance button when the outline is correct.
3. If the advance button is shown as unavailable, then re-define the pattern outline
and ensure that the defined area lies within the navigation map.
The define area will then be outlined in blue.

16.3.1.11. Select pattern layout method

1. Enter the name for the first pattern, if desired.

294 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Select whether subsequent patterns should be positioned manually or

automatically using a matrix layout.
3. Move the main X-ray image view, by mouse click and drag, until the position of
the bottom left-hand corner of the defined first pattern area is in the middle of
the screen; located at the center of the cross-hairs.
Note: This step provides fine adjustment to the position of the first pattern relative
to the navigation map. A suitable reference object at, or close to, the bottom left
corner of the defined pattern area should be used so that correct manual
placement of subsequent patterns may be quickly and easily defined.
4. Click the Advance button to save this finely adjusted location and outline of the
pattern and move to the next step.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 295

16.3.1.12. Manual pattern layout

This step involves locating the bottom left hand corners of all of the repeated
‘patterns’. The method employed is very similar to locating repeated boards (see
page 269).
This step involves the locating of the repeated patterns; the method used is very
similar to locating repeated boards.
1. Select the pattern to position by clicking the item in the list.

2. Double-click the bottom left-hand corner of that ‘pattern’ on the navigation map.
This will change the main display from the navigation map to the live X-ray
image.
296 User Guide V21.3 Software

3. Move the main X-ray image view, by mouse click and drag, until the equivalent
reference object as that selected for the first pattern is in the middle of the
screen; located at the center of the cross-hairs.
4. Click the Record button to save the finely adjusted location of this repeat pattern.
5. The icon for the repeat pattern concerned will now change from the red X to a
green tick.
6. Repeat steps 1 – 5 above for all additional repeat pattern locations.
Note: Defining the location of repeat patterns may be undertaken in any order
and sequentially numbered patterns do not need to be defined as being
physically next to each other. In other words, they can be positioned anywhere
within the board to suit specific user applications.
7. When all patterns have been positioned correctly, click the Advance button to
finish the wizard.

16.3.1.13. Matrix pattern layout

1. Enter the number or rows of patterns in the board, 1 in the example.

2. Enter the number of columns of patterns in the board, 2 in the example.
3. Enter the X pitch (1), the horizontal distance, in millimeters, between the origin,
or reference object location, of the first pattern and the origin of the next pattern
to its right on the sample holder.
4. Enter the Y pitch (2), the vertical distance, in millimeters, between the origin, or
reference object location, of the first pattern, and the origin of the next pattern
immediately above on the sample holder. In the example image shown, this
value is 0 as there is only one row of patterns.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 297

Note: The system will automatically number and define the placement of the
patterns in this method. It will go across the columns before going up the rows
on the sample holder.

5. Click the Advance button to add the patterns into the routine. The inspection
wizard will then finish.

16.3.2. Defining inspection steps within an automated routine

Once the automated inspection wizard has been completed, the software knows the
location and layout of all of the boards and all of the patterns that are on the sample
holder. It is now necessary to define exactly what is to be inspected in each pattern.
This is achieved by recording all the required inspection steps on the first pattern of
the first board and these will be automatically assigned, with the correct positional
off-set, to all other patterns on all other boards.
1. At the completion of the automated inspection routine wizard a text box appears
indicating this fact. Click on the OK button to clear this box.
2. Move the live X-ray image until it is located at the first inspection point on the
first ‘pattern’ of the first ‘board'.
3. Adjust any, or all, of the magnification, tube kV, tube power, oblique angle view,
frame average, contrast stretch and image enhancement until the desired image
that you require to be repeated for all of the samples at that position is shown
on-screen.
4. Click the Record button in the main editor controls located at the top of the editor
tab.
298 User Guide V21.3 Software

This sets up the current X-ray image view as that to be used at this position on
all subsequent runs of this inspection sequence. That is to say, what you see is
what you will get.
The default inspection step, created when the Record button is pressed, is that of
a manual pass/fail step (see page 280). Depending on how the automation
wizard was set up, this might require, or force, the operator to determine if the
current subject under test passes or fails when compared to the reference
product.
Editing inspection steps within an automated routine (see page 298) details how
to edit, or modify, the current inspection step. This enables:
 The inspection location, the type of X-ray view, and the conditions used to
create the image to be changed from what is currently set
 The pass/fail step to be changed into an automated BGA, area-void or
through-hole fill measurement, or an additional fiducial, or a
continuous-rotation view at an oblique angle
5. Move to the next inspection position and repeat 3 and 4 above.
6. Continue as necessary until all inspection steps have been created.
The full automated inspection routine, looking at all patterns on all boards is now
ready to use. Refer to using automatic inspections (see page 330) for more
details.

16.3.3. Editing inspection steps within an automated routine

Any of the editing procedures that follow may be undertaken after the initial
recording of an inspection step, during the creation of an automated inspection
routine. They may also be applied, at a later date, to any inspection step within a
previously stored routine.
In order to edit an existing automated inspection routine it must first be selected and
opened (see page 273). Any modifications that are made will be based upon the
sample(s) currently in the system, and these should be, ideally, the same reference
samples that were used to set up the inspection routine in the first place. Whatever
is used, it is necessary to ensure that the current samples are aligned relative to the
original set up. Otherwise, any positional changes defined on these new samples
may not be in the correct position. The software can confirm the current alignment
using the Re-Datum button, which uses the fiducials defined in the original routine
and any misalignment can be accounted for. Although the software will prompt the
user to check the alignment ahead of editing existing routines, this MUST be done
before any modifications are made.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 299

16.3.3.1. Main editor controls

The main editor controls are accessed using the buttons found at the top of the
editor tab. Refer to 'Create / Edit inspection steps' (see page 277).

Move through the routine steps using the following controls.

Record Move to Re-datum
a new next step the
step pattern

Move to Delete the

previous current
step step
These controls function as follows.
 Record function: this button will save a new step with the current view settings
(see page 297).
 Move to previous step: this button will load the previous step of the routine.
 Move to next step: this button will load the next step of the routine.
 Delete the current step: this button will delete the currently loaded step from the
routine.
 Re-datum button: this button will start the currently selected routine's alignment
procedure so as to ensure correct alignment when editing a routine.
If fiducial alignment is used, the system will automatically align the sample.
However, if the fiducial location is not found on-screen, the user is notified and
the live X-ray image must be moved until the fiducial area is back in the field of
view. The Re-Datum button should then be pressed again and alignment will be
correct.
If manual alignment is used, the operator should ensure and manually align the
live X-ray image, if necessary, so that the reference location is centered around
the cross-hairs on-screen. The Re-Datum button should then be pressed again
to confirm correct alignment.
300 User Guide V21.3 Software

Once the alignment of the sample(s) has been confirmed, changing the position,
magnification, oblique angle view, X-ray tube conditions, contrast stretch and
image enhancement from what was initially defined for any inspection step can
be easily achieved (see page 317). This is done as follows:
 Firstly, select the step that requires modifying.
 Then use the system controls to move and change the live X-ray image to
show the view that is now needed at this step, on-screen.
 Once satisfied with the new, revised view, click the Update button to confirm
the new situation within the routine.
Other editing functions for the inspection steps can be found on one of the four
mini-tabs contained within the editor tab.

Item Description
1 General details (see page 301)
2 Reference image (see page 303)
3 Automatic / custom settings (see page 304)
4 Routine layout (see page 306)
 User Guide V21.3 Software 301

Edit General Details

The general details window allows editing of the basic settings for an inspection
step. These are:

Item Option Sets

5 Step Name Click and edit to change the step name. This
allows the user to apply an application specific
name to that particular inspection step, in place
of a sequential number. For example, indicating
that you are inspecting BGA03 instead of at
step003 within the routine. This information will
be shown in the report.
6 Grade required Check or clear the box to force the operator to
enter a Pass / Fail grade at this step in the
inspection routine.
7 Wait for Average Select to ensure any frame averaging has
completed before starting the analysis or moving
to the next step.
8 Manual Advance Choose the relevant advance option for this step
if it is to be different from the default set in the
inspection wizard.
Auto advance after Enter the required time delay before moving to
the next inspection step, in seconds, when the
auto-advance option is chosen.
302 User Guide V21.3 Software

Item Option Sets

9 Comment Click and type instructions, or comments, that
need to be shown to an operator at this step
during the inspection routine.
10 Update button After changing any of the values for items 5 - 9,
click the update button to save the details.
The Update button can be pressed after each
individual modification or, instead, after all
changes have been made. No changes will be
made to the routine until the Update button is
pressed. A new window will be displayed asking
the user if the changes are to be made to all
steps or just the current step.
11 Save map button Saves the current map as the map for this
inspection routine.
12 Save location button Updates the location data for the current step.
Note: No location changes will be made to the
routine until the Save location button is pressed.
If the location is changed, then it may be
necessary to also change the reference image
associated with the step.
13 Location fiducial button Click this button to display the fiducial window
(see page 270) and to define an additional
fiducial point within the inspection routine. For
example, it may be necessary to ensure correct
sample positioning ahead of an automated
area-void measurement. Once the fiducial is
saved, this step will be converted to be a
location fiducial step.
14 Rotation fiducial button Click this button to display the fiducial window
(see page 270) and to define an additional
rotational fiducial point within the inspection
routine. Once the fiducial is saved, this step will
be converted to be a rotation fiducial step.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 303

Edit the Reference Image

The software allows for a separate reference image to be on-screen at each
inspection step, to help guide the Operator in analysis. If a reference image has
been set to be saved during the creation of an inspection routine (see page 279),
then the image on-screen at the time the Record button is pressed will be used as
the default reference image for that step.
It may be necessary to change the reference image associated with an inspection
step.
There are three options.
 Choose a new image from an existing file (14) after which a file selection box
will appear.
 Save the current live image as the reference image (15).
 Delete the current reference image (16).
304 User Guide V21.3 Software

Edit Custom Options

The custom details tab allows the user to change the current pass / fail inspection
step into a specialist action.
There are three options.
 Add an automation routine (17)
 Add a pattern cursor (18)
 Orbit the image (19)
 User Guide V21.3 Software 305

These are used as follows.

Add an automation routine
An automatic measurement routine can be executed at the location of the current
step.

1. Click the browse button to choose either an area-void measurement or a

BGA measurement routine. When the button is pressed the window below
should be displayed.

2. Select a routine by clicking the item and then OK.

3. Clear a selected routine by clicking the Delete button. A confirmation window will
be displayed.
Refer to automated BGA and area-void measurements (see page 267) for more
details.
4. Selecting Cancel will close the window without making any changes.
In some cases, identical devices may be used but in a different orientation. When
this is the case, the same automatic measurement routine can be selected as
described above but a rotational angle for the inspection needs to be included. Enter
the angle of rotation for the step and press the 'Rotate' button.
306 User Guide V21.3 Software

The angle of rotation is applied in an anti-clockwise direction.

This feature is only available for Template Based Analysis. No other measurement
type supports device rotation.
Add a pattern cursor
A previously defined overlay cursor for aiding via fill analysis can be added to the
current step (see page 310).
1. Select the required cursor name from the list.
2. De-select a cursor by selecting the None option. Refer to Through-hole
percentage fill analysis (see page 261) for more information.
Orbit the image
The system can provide a live X-ray view as the detector continuously orbits (see
page 310) around the inspection step location at the set oblique angle view. The
system will continue to orbit until:
 The user presses Stop.
 Advances to the next step.
 The auto-advance delay expires at which point the system automatically moves
to the next step.
This option is only available at an oblique angle, otherwise the selection is
grayed out.
Set the orbit as follows.
1. Select the direction of rotation.
2. Set the Orbit speed. Setting the orbit speed to 0 will de-select the option.

Edit the Routine Layout

This option is only available in Engineer Access
 User Guide V21.3 Software 307

The program layout editor allows the engineer to change the serial number options
for the boards and patterns in a stored inspection routine from that previously saved
during the automation wizard.
The engineer is also able to perform one of the four options provided in the Select
Action list.
 Reposition Boards
 Change alignment method
 Reposition Patterns
 Set analysis for all
The required action should be selected then the Go button pressed.

The system will then reload the inspection wizard at the appropriate step for the
action selected, unless 'Set analysis for all' was chosen. Follow the instructions and
continue the wizard to the end. Refer to automated inspection routine (see page
276) wizard for further details. If 'Set analysis for all' was selected then a new
window will open allowing the user to select a single Automation Routine to be run
for every inspection step in the Automatic Inspection Routine.
308 User Guide V21.3 Software

When the layout editor tab is selected the overlay navigation map window is
displayed showing the user the outlines of each board and pattern and also the
location of all inspection steps.

Spots (20) illustrate where steps are located on the navigation map. These will be
blue on the source board and pattern and green on subsequent repeats.

16.3.3.2. Adding a manual inspection step

1. Move the image and adjust the system settings to ensure that the feature to be
inspected is located correctly and is clearly visible.
2. Click the Record button to add the current settings as an inspection step for this
pattern.

3. This will open a new window asking whether to insert the new step before or
after the current step.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 309

This option is displayed as it may be desirable to add an additional fiducial

ahead of the first inspection point. This may prove useful in the case of an
automated inspection of area voiding such that it can be ensured that the test
piece is aligned relative to the area void set position such that the area
calculation is made at the same position.

This will only be displayed after the first step. Subsequent steps will
automatically be placed behind.
4. Once the step has been added the general details of the step can be edited by
changing the fields on the General tab (see page 299).

16.3.3.3. Adding a fiducial alignment step to a pattern

 Press the Fiducial Alignment button to enter the fiducial editor mode (see page
270).

If the automatic advance option is not selected when the fiducial step is created
then the routine will wait for manual confirmation.

16.3.3.4. Adding an automatic inspection routine step

1. Add a manual inspection step (see page 308).
2. Select the custom details tab.
3. Click the browse button to select a routine. (see page 298)
4. Select the store details options for the results of this routine.
The two options are used as follows.
 Select the Store details for fails option to save only fail results.
 Select the Store details for passes option to save only pass results.
 Select both options to save all details.
310 User Guide V21.3 Software

If both option are left unchecked, then no details will be saved.

16.3.3.5. Adding a cursor inspection step

1. Add a manual inspection step (see page 308).
2. Select the custom details tab.
3. Choose the appropriate cursor from the list.

16.3.3.6. Adding an orbiting inspection step

1. Add a manual inspection step (see page 308) for the purposes of orbiting the
view saved must be an oblique view.
2. Select the custom details tab.
3. Select the orbit speed from the drop down list, the higher the number the faster
the speed.
4. Select the orbit direction.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 311

16.3.3.7. Grading options - logging passes and failures during automated inspection
It is possible to use the machine for visual inspection only. However, it is often much
more useful to also save data on the status of each inspection step. For example,
passes can be logged to prove quality compliance and failures can be logged for
quality improvement and process control purposes. As such, it is therefore very
important to ensure that the results are easily transferable and the locations of any
failed inspection steps in particular are able to be relayed simply to a re-work station
where defects can be assessed and re-worked or repaired.
The software is able to create reports of the automated inspection results. These
reports contain:
 Details of the sample under test, i.e. product, serial number, date of test,
operator.
 A listing of all the inspection steps undertaken during the automated routine.
 Thumbnail images of each step.
 The reference navigation map, set up during the creation of the of the
automated inspection routine. (see page 281)
 The location of any failed inspection steps highlighted on the navigation map.
 The location of failed pattern(s) within board(s).
The reports are saved as HTML documents and, therefore, can be easily
transferred, and viewed, on any PC using an Internet browser. The HTML format
allows the user to click on any of the thumbnail images in the report which will then
provide the full X-ray image, at that step, for additional analysis. By configuring the
default way that automated inspection routines are run (see page 278), it is possible
save the full X-ray image for a pass and /or a fail, or not save any X-ray image at all.
This gives flexibility in terms of reducing the amount data in the reports, if required.
It may be decided that during the automated inspection routine some discretion is
left to the operator as to what report data is saved. However, it is possible to force
the operator to record a pass / fail judgment for every manual visual inspection step
made.
Grading required
In the Edit General Details tab (see page 299), force the operator to grade a manual
visual inspection step by selecting the Grade Required option. Then click the Update
button (see page 299). During the automated inspection run, the software will not
proceed to the next step until a pass or fail judgment has been made by the
operator.
The first time after changing, and updating, the grade required option in any step of
an automated routine, the software will prompt with the following on-screen
question.
312 User Guide V21.3 Software

Selecting Yes will make grading required in all of the manual inspection steps of that
routine. However, each step can be subsequently configured individually to suit
specific requirements.
Note: Automated inspection steps in the routine, such as the BGA measurements,
are graded, or otherwise, through their wizard definitions and so the setting of the
Grade Required option of these steps is irrelevant.
Grading optional
With the Grade Required option unchecked, operators can grade at their discretion
during the automated inspection.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 313

Grading function
The operator can either be forced to choose, or optionally to choose, whether to
pass or fail a manual inspection step. Their choice is made by using the tick, Pass,
and cross, Fail, buttons.

When the Fail button is clicked, a second screen is displayed for more details to be
(optionally) entered (assuming the grade screen option has been ticked (see page
278).).
314 User Guide V21.3 Software

If the system (through a timed inspection step), or the operator, tries to advance to
the next inspection point when Grade Required is selected, then this second screen is
automatically displayed.
Whether an inspection step is a Pass or a Fail will depend on the operator's choice.
The operator can enter a numerical failure code, a number between 0 – 9, as a short
code to indicate a generic failure, for example, and so provide more information for
later analysis.
The operator may also add a comment as further explanation of this particular
inspection result, for example.
Note: Any failure codes and comments that are added by the Operator will be shown
in the final report.
Finally, there is a box to Save Result Image, which will save the current image, seen
on the live X-ray view, into the final report.

16.3.3.8. Editing Failure Codes

The failure codes can be edited in Engineer Access only.
1. The results codes can be edited to relate to any existing failure mechanisms
descriptions.
2. The description of the short codes can be edited by clicking the Edit Result Codes
button under Automatic Inspections Routines - Options minitab.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 315

3. This will bring up a new window listing all the preset fault codes.

4. Double clicking on any line under the Test Type column will allow for direct text
entry of that description. The short code can also be changed in the same
fashion.

16.3.3.9. Automatic advance

The user can set the machine to advance through the inspection routine
automatically, with a time delay in seconds, between each inspection step. The
operator can stop the machine at any time to dwell on an inspection step by
pressing the Stop button.

1. If the Grade Required option is selected, then the machine will present the grading
screen (see page 311), before moving on to the next inspection step.

2. Select the Auto advance after option and set the desired delay, in seconds, to set
the automatic advance.
316 User Guide V21.3 Software

3. Click the Update button.

A question will then be asked

The answer to this will usually depend on the type of inspection being used.
If Yes, then this will also apply to any of the alignment steps that have been set
up for the automated inspection routine. Therefore, it will usually be necessary
to set the alignment steps back to Manual advance.
Note: The operator can disable automatic advance on all of the steps by clearing the
Enable automatic advance box.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 317

16.3.4. Changing an existing inspection step

Before editing any existing steps it is recommended the board alignment is checked
by pressing the 'Re-datum' button. (see page 299)
1. Select the inspection point of interest using the Forward and Back buttons or by
choosing the Step Number required from the list of steps in the drop-down list.

2. Make any changes that are required.

3. Click the Update button to save changes in the step detail
Note: This function will not update the location of the step.
If the location of the step has been changed, click the Update location button.
Button Image
Update

Update location
318 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.3.5. Deleting an inspection step

1. Select the inspection point of interest using the Forward and Back buttons or by
choosing the Step Number required from list of steps in the drop-down list.
2. Click the Delete button.

16.3.6. Inserting an inspection step

1. Select the inspection step immediately before the new step is to be inserted
using the Forward and Back buttons or by choosing the Step Number required from
list of steps in the drop-down list.
2. Move and modify the live X-ray image until the required position and the desired
image are shown on-screen. Then click Record.
If you are recording, creating, the second step of a routine, the following
question will appear.

3. Choose Yes to insert this new step after the first or No to make this new step, the
first step of the routine.
The latter situation might really only be required if an additional fiducial location
step is needed ahead of an automated measurement, for example.
4. Edit any other details and click the Update button.

16.4. Running an inspection routine

1. Click on the Replay tab.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 319

This will display the following screen.

Press the go button. If a serial number is entered, or required to be

entered, then the results of the inspection sequence will be stored in the
database.
Once all the required serial numbers have been entered the display will change

and the user will be required to press the start button.

The options presented to the operator during the running of an automated

routine depend on how the automated inspection routine wizard was configured.
In particular, forcing serial number(s) to be entered, the auto-advance (see page
315) setting and grading options (see page 311) will all affect how they respond.

16.5. Data storage

The location for saving HTML reports to is selectable from the Automatic Inspection
Routines Options tab. (see page 278)
320 User Guide V21.3 Software

Pressing the 'Browse' button will open a window allowing the user to select the
storage location.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 321

The images and HTML reports are, by default, stored in the directory structure
shown below.

Item Description
1 Installation directory, by default C:\Users\Public\.
Note: The location is defined from configuring the way that
automated routines are run (see page 278).
2 Public Documents so all users can access the same folders.
3 Public Dage folder.
4 XRay system public folder for all results and log files.
5 Directory chosen as the root directory for pattern results.

6 Automated Inspection Routine name.

7 Results for this Automated Inspection Routine (default
location).
322 User Guide V21.3 Software

8 Individual directory for each time the Automated Inspection

Routine has been run, using the date and time or a serial
number is used.
Note: If a serial number is not entered, for any reason, prior to the use of an
automated inspection routine, then those results are not stored in the system
database in the same directory. However, a report and the resulting images will still
be stored separately for this by viewing (see page 325) or exporting (see page 328)
the results at the end of the run. The results will also be stored in the automation
directory using a date/time code.
All automated measurement data such as from BGA and area-void analysis,
together with any manual grading and comments are also saved separately in an
ODBC compliant database which can be accessed through SQL Server 2008 R2.
However, Nordson DAGE recommend you DO NOT use any third-party software to
connect to this database.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 323

16.6. Viewing the on-line summary report

The inspection report summary can be viewed directly after completion of an
inspection run, or at any time (off-line) by selecting the View report mini-tab.

Item Description
1 View report mini-tab.
2 Select the serial number of a previously run routine, if it is to be
reviewed. Otherwise the serial number, if any, of the most recent
run of the inspection routine is automatically displayed.
3 A red X at the top of the inspection run tree-diagram indicates that
this board has failed as one or more steps in subsidiary patterns
324 User Guide V21.3 Software

Item Description
have failed. Click on the + sign to expand the report for further
detail.
4 Step0002 inspection point has failed (red X). Click on + for
further details.
5 Right-click on an inspection step to edit the pass/fail judgment.
For example, if an error was made during the run, or to add (or
edit) the failure code and/or comment.
Editing step results is limited to Engineer Access only.
6 This board has no failures.
Double clicking any step will return the system to that particular location in the
inspection sequence but will not adjust the power and voltage levels accordingly.
This is useful if additional inspection or analysis is required to verify if a fault is
acceptable or needs rework.
If the inspection sequence included an automated inspection measurement, such as
BGA measurement (see page 191), then more details are given for each
measurement the system has made, by clicking on the relevant + symbol.
When the result tab is selected the navigation map is shown in place of the live
X-ray image. The navigation map contains markers indicating the location(s) of
failed steps.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 325

The full HTML report can be viewed by pressing the Report button (see page 323).

16.7. Viewing an automated inspection routine report off-line

The reports are saved as HTML documents and, therefore, can be easily
transferred, and viewed, on any PC using an Internet browser. The HTML format
allows the user to click on elements within the report to see additional content, such
as full X-ray images and results of measurements. The HTML format has been
optimized for viewing with Microsoft Corporation Internet Explorer.
The HTML reports use Active content so ensure that the browser is set to "Allow
active content to run from files on my computer".

1. Select the experiment that is to have its report regenerated from the drop down
list in the View Report mini-tab (see page 323).
2. Click the Report button.
326 User Guide V21.3 Software

When the report is requested, there are a number of options that can be
chosen. For example, to limit the number of pictures included in the report so as
to save disk space. There are also options for the operator to add some
additional title text and comments that will be included in the displayed result. It
is recommended to include, as a minimum, the images of the failures and the
navigation map.

When the OK button is pressed, the report is generated and a new window
opened to display it. The report is also saved to the hard drive and can be
accessed directly by browsing the directory structure (see page 319).
If the system is part of a network, then the report now will be available to any
other computer on the network. This is particularly useful, for example, for
passing data and images to re-work stations.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 327

If serial numbers are used for boards and/or patterns, then the results will be
stored in successive sub-directories in the database with a separate HTML
report for each serial number. All subsidiary reports associated with a specific
inspection routine can be accessed via a link within the parent report. A sample
report is shown below.

Item Description
1 Failure positions marked in:
 Orange when manually failed
 Red when failed automatically
2 Navigation map
3 Click on thumbnail image for full X-ray image of that step.
Only the center portion of the image is displayed in the
thumbnail.
If an automated measurement is part of the routine, for example BGA
measurement, then at that step in the report there will be a further link which,
when clicked, will produce a more detailed information.
328 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.7.1. Exporting the report

A report may be exported by pressing the Export Report button (1).

As the report is an HTML document, it means that it can contain links to additional
images and information. As such, this additional data has to be located at specific
places in the directory structure in order to ensure its correct display. Whilst the data
is within the system software structure this makes no issue. However, if the report is
required to be sent to another location, for example by file copy or e-mail, then
because of Windows™ operation, the necessary links may not be correctly
organized. In order to solve this issue, all exported reports are stored in
user-defined, self-contained directories. The top-level directory includes all images
and HTML files necessary to view the complete report. This whole directory can
then be copied or e-mailed thereby ensuring that the report can be re-generated on
other PCs.
When an inspection routine, which included a serial number, has completed, a
message window will be displayed, but only if the system has been configured to
display this information.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 329

The full path of the report can be copied and then pasted into Internet Explorer to
locate the file.
The report can be viewed by clicking the link on the message window.
1. Click OK to close the message window.
When the Export Report button is clicked, the operator is prompted to choose the
name of the directory and the location in which to store the copy of the report.

2. Click Save to confirm and store the data.

330 User Guide V21.3 Software

3. A message window will be displayed confirming the Data has been exported
correctly.

Press 'OK' to close the window.

16.8. Using automatic inspections

Automated inspection routines can only be used once they have been defined (see
page 281). Once defined, they can be repeated as many times as is required.
Different routines can be quickly loaded to enable inspection to satisfy changing
work demand.

16.8.1. Making automated inspections

16.8.1.1. Selecting an inspection routine
1. Load the routine to be used by clicking the Open button in the top level
automated inspection routine controls (see page 299).
 User Guide V21.3 Software 331

The system will only execute the currently loaded routine. The name of the
loaded routine is next to the title of the main inspection tab.

16.8.1.2. Board, pattern or inspection step exclusion

It may be necessary to use a routine that has multiple patterns on multiple boards
but not all of the possible samples may be present on the sample holder. Therefore,
it is possible to exclude board(s), pattern(s) or individual inspection steps from a
specific experimental run. The large navigation map is displayed as an aid for
aligning samples and also for identifying which objects, if any, should be excluded.
This exclusion will last only for the duration of the current test and will not affect the
saved routine.
This can be achieved by right clicking the board, pattern or inspection step to be
excluded. A new menu will be displayed giving the option to exclude an object by
clicking on the word 'Include'.

This will remove the tick displayed by the word 'Include' in the menu and will place a
red slash over the object to be excluded. If an object is removed by accident then
repeating the above action will allow the board, pattern or step to be included int he
inspection routine again.
332 User Guide V21.3 Software

The x,y location of each board, pattern and inspection step is also displayed when
the right click menu is selected for an object.

Selecting the x,y location will open up an edit box, allowing the user to adjust the
values if necessary.

These values will be saved in the database.

16.8.1.3. Starting the inspection

1. Click the Run Automatic Routines tab.

2. Click the Start button to initiate an inspection.

Pressing the Start button will display a window allowing the operator to enter
serial numbers and configure which boards and patterns should be included in
this specific experimental run.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 333

The serial number window will only be displayed if the routine has been
configured to require a serial number for a board or pattern to be entered.
334 User Guide V21.3 Software

If the automation routine has not been setup to use serial numbers for patterns
or boards, then one serial number for the entire run can be entered directly on
the run screen without going to the serial number entry screen. In this case the
following screen will be displayed.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 335

Configuring the inspection run

Once the Start button has been pressed a large navigation map will be shown over
the live X-ray image area and this should prompt the operator as to the sample type
being inspected and the necessary layout the samples need to be in for this
inspection. Using sample holders with pre-set alignment configurations may help
(Contact your local Nordson DAGE representative for further information.).
Entering serial numbers

If the routine is setup to allow serial numbers for boards and/or patterns, each object
should have a text field for a serial number to be entered (see page 299).
1. Enter the serial number for a specific item, by clicking on the text associated
with that position and typing in the required value.
2. If an incorrect value is entered, simply right-click on the text again and enter the
correct value.
Note: If a bar code reader is attached to the system, then serial numbers may be
entered by this method for each sample location. Serial numbers can be
numeric and alpha-numeric in value.
Should a serial number that has been entered already exist within the software
database then the system will prompt the operator with a warning message.
336 User Guide V21.3 Software

The operator can either overwrite the previously stored data with the new results
that are to be taken. For example, it may only be required to keep successful
product quality information following re-work. Alternatively, the Operator must
modify, or change the current serial number. For example, add additional coding
to the serial number so that the original data and the data after re-work are
maintained separately.
Note: The system defines a serial number as being unique in value. Therefore if,
for example, the serial number testboard1 was attempted to be used for two
completely different inspection routines then this would not be allowed and the
warning message would appear.
Excluding boards and patterns after the Serial Numbers have been entered.
Individual boards, patterns and inspection steps can be excluded after the serial
numbers have been entered.
1. Exclude a board, pattern or step by simply right clicking on the appropriate
object and de-selecting Include. The tick should be replaced by a cross,
indicating the item will not be inspected.

2. Include a previously excluded item by simply double-clicking on the cross. The

cross should be replaced by a tick.
3. Once all serial numbers have been entered and any boards or patterns have
been excluded, click the Continue button to start the inspection.
Note: In order to reduce cycle times, it is recommended that all objects are on
the sample holder, within the X-ray system and the X-rays are turned before
pressing the Continue button.
If the force serial number option has been set (see page 299) and serial
numbers have not been entered for all items then a prompting message will be
displayed to encourage the operator to fill in the necessary details.
4. Click the Exit button to cancel execution of the run, if required.

5. Once the Continue button has been clicked, the system will load the first
alignment step of the first board included in the test.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 337

16.8.1.4. Moving through the inspection sequence

Each inspection point is called a step. The routine is made up of a number of
different layers. The top-level layer is a board or part. Each board (part) is made up
of at least one alignment step plus at least one instance of a pattern. A board can
contain a number of instances of the same pattern. A Pattern is made up of a
number of inspection steps. There can be any number of each of the different types
of inspection step.
Once an inspection routine is loaded, moving through the sequence is simply a
matter of clicking on the required step. Clicking the Run (1) button will start the
routine.

16.8.1.5. Correcting for sample misalignment

Each board will have either one manual alignment step or two automatic fiducial
alignment steps (see page 270) defined. The method for correcting any sample
offset differs depending upon which alignment method has been used.
338 User Guide V21.3 Software

Manual alignment
If manual alignment has been used, then the image should be aligned according to
the reference image and then the Datum button should be pressed.
Note: The comments and reference image saved during the routine's creation will
help remind the operator of the correct alignment.
Make the alignment as follows.
1. Use the mouse control to align the main X-ray image so that it is identical to that
shown in the reference image.
2. Click the Re-Datum button (1).
The amount the system manipulator has been moved to re-align the current
X-ray image to be equivalent to that of the reference image is known by the
system. These movements are then used as an off-set for all subsequent
inspection steps for this particular experiment only.
3. Move to the next step by pressing the Play button (2).

Fiducial alignment
If fiducial alignment has been used, the system will automatically search the current
image for the first (location) fiducial area. If it is found then the system will highlight
the area and display the percentage match. Once matched, the system will then
move to the second (rotational) fiducial location and search for that fiducial area. If it
is found then the system will, again, highlight the area and display the percentage
match. In this way, the system automatically calculates the positional and rotational
off-set of the current sample compared to the reference sample. It will then apply
these off-sets to every inspection step for the current experiment only.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 339

Missing fiducial
If either fiducial is not found on-screen then the message below is displayed. This
can happen if the current sample is so far away from the original reference position
that the defined fiducial area is no longer within the field of view.

In order to correct for a missing fiducial, do the following.

1. Use the mouse controls to move the live X-ray image until the fiducial alignment
area is seen in the center of the screen.
2. Click the Re-Datum button.

This system will then repeat its search for the fiducial area within the current
image. If successful, then the procedure will continue as above. If
un-successful, move the image some more and click the Re-Datum button again.
Incorrect object matched
If there is one, or more, locations that might have similar fiducial areas within the
sample, then it is possible that the system will choose the wrong fiducial area.
If this happens proceed as follows.
1. Halt the run using the Stop button.
2. Next move the image so that only the desired fiducial area is visible on the
screen.
3. Click the Re-datum button.
If it is not possible to only display the desired object, then a new fiducial should
be taught for the routine that is unique for a given field of view.
340 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.8.1.6. Moving through the inspection sequence

At each inspection step the tube voltage, power and contrast settings may have
been set to different values. Therefore, you may need to allow a little time for the
tube to stabilize before the next X-ray image is fully available.
1. Move to the next step using the Play button or selecting the next step in the
sequence.

16.8.1.7. Automatic movement between inspection steps

Your engineer may have programmed the routine to automatically advance from
step to step after a pre-determined number of seconds. In this case it is possible to
override these timings in four ways.
 Clicking the Play button to skip the delay and advance to the next point.
 Clicking the Stop button to hold indefinitely at this step.
 Clearing the Enable automatic advance option to stop all automatic advancing.
 Grading the step by using the Pass / Fail buttons, or by the use of the keypad.

16.8.1.8. Recording and grading results

The routine may have set the system so that at each manual inspection point the
operator must press the Pass / Fail buttons.

Alternatively, if automatic movement between steps is enabled then the operator

can only choose to record failures as they appear on-screen by pressing the Fail
button.
Depending on how the inspection run is configured (see page 278) different options
may appear as a pass or fail is recorded. For example, a recording window may
appear.
If the inspection point was failed, then it is possible to:
1. Enter a failure code (1).
2. Enter a comment (2).
3. Save the image (3).
 User Guide V21.3 Software 341

4. Click the Save button (4) to record this data to the database.

The comments and images saved can be used directly at a re-work station to
convey more information about the analysis. The failure code can be used to
analyze the historical performance of the production line.
A Pass may also be indicated manually by pressing the Enter key on the keyboard.
A Fail may also be indicated manually by pressing a keyboard number between 0 –
9. The number pressed will be logged as the failure code.
This allows failures of the same type to be noted within the report for subsequent
process evaluation.
The recording window will not appear if a keyboard value is pressed and therefore
comments cannot be added.

16.8.1.9. Automated Routine analysis

These are automated measurements and require no intervention from the operator.
This includes BGA, Area Void, Wire Sweep, QFN and Pad Analysis.

16.8.2. Viewing the on-line inspection report

The inspection report and its summary can be viewed directly after inspection has
completed, or at any time by selecting the View report tab (see page 277). Running
an inspection routine (see page 318) has more information.
342 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.8.3. Second Monitor Results Screen

The Second Monitor can be used to display either a larger Navigation Map (see
page 52) or the Results of an AIR (see page 265) as it is being executed. This is set
from the More Options menu (see page 34).
When the Second Monitor is set as the Navigation Map, it can be used to move the
sample tray around by either using a double left mouse click to move a point of
interest to the center of the Inspect Screen, or to define a Region Of Interest to be
displayed.
If the Second Monitor is set to display the Results, it is not possible to move around
the map in the same way. The results screen, when selected, will show the
Navigation Map of the loaded AIR and is indicated by the word Results displayed in
the top left corner of the map.

As an AIR is being executed, the results map displayed on the second monitor will
be updated with a series of green ticks for inspection steps which have passed the
required criteria, or red crosses to indicate steps which have failed.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 343

By clicking on the ticks or crosses, it is possible to display a small window, which

gives more detail of the step along with a thumbnail image.

Not all automated measurement steps are supported.

16.8.4. Importing and Using CAD Data

It is possible to import a CAD file to assist with the set-up of an Automated
Inspection Routine.
This CAD file must be in XML format and will contain all the positional data required
for the AIR.
344 User Guide V21.3 Software

16.8.4.1. CAD Import Wizard

Before importing a suitable CAD file, ensure a navigation map (see page 52) has
been created for the samples to be inspected.
Select the Automatic Inspections Routine tab and press the CAD Import button to
start the CAD Import Wizard.

This will allow the X-ray application software to extract positional and analysis
parameters from the XML file. Where fiducial alignment is used, the wizard manages
the capture of appropriate images.
Wizard Step 1
The tab for the first step allows the user to select the required XML file using the

‘Import’ button, and select whether the current map should be used or
a new single board or full scan map should be created.

Pressing the ‘Next’ button will start any new scan that may have been
requested and move the wizard to Step 2.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 345

Wizard Step 2
No user interaction is required. If 'Current Map' was selected in Step 1 then the
Wizard will move directly to Step 3.
Wizard Step 3 & 4
346 User Guide V21.3 Software

There is a button on this tab that controls whether the sample can be

moved:

or a fiducial image selected: . Initially the fiducial mark should be moved to

the center of the image marked by the red crosshairs and the button pressed to
toggle to the other mode. In the fiducial image selection mode clicking on the image
will define a rectangular match area in the middle of the screen. Once selected the

button can be pressed to test whether this image is sufficiently unique and
large enough to be used for fiducial matching and, if it is, the selection area is shown
outlined in green rather than blue and the ‘Fiducial Unique’ indicator will turn from
gray to green. Once the first fiducial mark has been set-up the ‘Next’ button should
be pressed to move to set-up the second fiducial in exactly the same way as the
first.
Wizard Step 5
This tab is associated with importing an XML file for a manually aligned routine but
does not currently have any functionality requiring user interaction so moves the
wizard straight to Step 6.
Wizard Step 6
On this tab the user is given the option to complete the import process by pressing

the button.
 347

17. Capturing video images

The video recording function allows the user to record the main X-ray image
on-screen during inspection in the following ways:
 Live during sample movement
 As the X-ray image is averaged when sample movement stops
 Continuously, or for a user determined time, after the averaging process is
complete that allows inclusion in the video of the fully contrast-stretched and
fully-enhanced final X-ray image
The video recorded will be as displayed on the inspect screen, including Quad
Screen View, pseudo color and any overlays used.
If overlays are used during the video recording, the Video Calibration (see page
349) needs to have been completed.
The video recording option adds the facility to record the X-ray image, both live and
during averaging, as an AVI file. This file can be viewed using the Windows Media
Player or many other video handling programs.
The AVI file format is a wrapper format. This means that the images inside the file
can be in many different formats. For example, they could be uncompressed, or
compressed using many different compression methods, such as MPEG, CinePak,
Indeo, MJPEG or Windows Media 9.
The type of compression used is determined by the codec
(Compressor/Decompressor) selected. Some codecs are supplied with Windows OS
and additional codecs can be installed from the Microsoft website or obtained from
other companies.
Any third party codecs used must be 64-bit versions and compatible with Windows 7
64-bit.
Using compression in the finished file is a trade off between speed of acquisition
and final file size. Saving uncompressed images is much faster than compressing,
but the saved file can be enormous. For example, a file of one minute of live X-ray
video with 1280 x 1024 pixels per frame in uncompressed format will be about 1 GB
in size.

17.1. Using video capture

Note: The video capture controls need to be turned on from the Options screen which
is only available for Supervisor access (see page 373).
348 User Guide V21.3 Software

Video recording is controlled by four buttons and an LED recording indicator on the
inspect screen.

Item Description Action Indicator state

1 Record button Recording starts, the X-ray image will be Turns red
recorded in the video file.
2 Pause button Recording is paused, the file is still open, Turns yellow
click Record or Pause again to resume
recording.
3 Stop button Recording stops. The file is closed. Turned off
4 Change This is the same as the change filename
filename button on the options screen.
5 Recording LED, lit during recording as indicated above.
When recording, the recording buttons look like this.

After the video recording has been completed, the LED may continue to flash
yellow. This indicates the video compression is still active and playback of the video
cannot be performed until this has completed.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 349

17.2. Setting the video capture options

Note: The video capture controls need to be turned on from the Options screen which
is only available for Supervisor access (see page 373).
The Options screen contains various video recording options.
The Video capture controls are enabled by selecting the feature from the drop down
list in the Show Controls group. This shows or hides the video controls on the Inspect
screen and the Video Capture Options controls on the Options screen.

The Video Capture group on the Options screen controls all the video capture options.

The options available are:

Option Comments
Resolution Determines the frame size (in pixels) of the images that will be
saved. The smaller the image, the faster the save and the smaller
the file size but, of course, the less detail there will be in the
images.
 1600 x 1200 is the standard resolution for 2.0 megapixel II
and 2.0 or 3.0 megapixel FPD systems (only shown when
detector size is fitted.).
 1280 x 1024 is the standard resolution for all 1.3 megapixel
systems.
350 User Guide V21.3 Software

Option Comments
 720 x 480 is the standard resolution used for DVDs.
 352 x 288 is the standard resolution used for PAL television.
 352 x 240 is the standard resolution used for NTSC television.
Custom resolution sizes must be values that divide by 4.
Resolutions greater than the fitted detector size will not be
displayed as a selection in the list.
The image will be stretched to fit the size it is being saved at. So if
a size is chosen that does not have a 4:3 aspect ratio then the
image will be distorted.
Calibrate The system should be calibrated before videos are recorded. This
is necessary to set the frame rate (number of frames per second)
of the video. If you do not calibrate then the videos will not be
replayed at the correct speed. The calibration process determines
the speed to use for each of the image sizes, both with and
without compression.
When the system is being calibrated the recording LED turns
green. The progress indicator shows how much of the calibration
has been completed and progress messages are displayed in the
message text box.
If you try to record a video without calibrating, then you will be
asked if wish to calibrate before recording the video.
Change This will open a filename dialog to choose the filename to use
Filename when a video is saved.
Change The default codec is sufficient for all applications and should be
Codec set to Microsoft Video 1.
However, if you want to use a different codec then a preloaded
codec can be selected from the drop down list.

Once the required codec has been selected a warning message

will be displayed suggesting the video capture system is
recalibrated.
Settings Some Codecs allow for user settings. Refer to 'Video Codecs' for
more information (see page 352).
Save live If this is selected then the live image will be saved during
images averaging. If it is not selected then the averaged image will be
saved as it builds up.
Pause If this is selected then recording will be paused automatically a
recording given time after averaging finishes. This saves recording an
unchanging image. Recording resumes when the image changes.
The progress indicator will count down the time to when the
recording will pause.
Stop If this is selected then recording will stop after the specified time
 User Guide V21.3 Software 351

Option Comments
recording interval. The progress indicator will count down the time to when
after n the recording will pause. Recording will only continue when the
seconds sample is moved.
Note: As an example, if a video is required of a complete
inspection routine then this function enables the operator to take
as long as necessary to inspect the sample in real time but only n
seconds of that time will be included in the video. This will make
for smaller file sizes.
Disk space If this is selected, then a warning will be displayed if the free disk
warning. space goes below the specified value.
Automatically If this is selected, then the filename has a number appended to it.
increment This is automatically incremented each time a recording is started.
filenames If this was selected with the options shown above then the next
file would be saved as test_0.avi. The one after that would be
test_1.avi and so on.
Include This includes any overlays on the screen to be recorded with the
overlays video, e.g. any void or BGA outlines.
Timestamp A timestamp can be attached to the video

This can be displayed as Frames, Seconds or the industry

standard SMPTE, which displays hours, minutes, seconds and
frames in a single display.
352 User Guide V21.3 Software

17.3. Video Codecs

The list of codes available for use will depend on what is installed on the PC. Some
codecs allow the user to configure different settings, such as the compression ratio
or the record and playback speed.
Select the required Codec from the drop down list and press the 'Settings' button.

If the selected codec does not allow any user configuration a message to this effect
will be displayed.

Other codecs will allow varying degrees of adjustment but not all will necessarily be
installed as standard.
Microsoft Video 1 is standard and allows for a basic quality adjustment which affects
the compression ratio and resultant size of the final video file.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 353

Xvid MPEG-4 Codec is an alternative codec that may be downloaded and installed
which allows for more complex user adjustments

Any third party video codecs installed must be native 64-bit versions and compatible
with Windows 7 64-bit OS.
Your local Nordson DAGE representative can offer more advice if required.
354 User Guide V21.3 Software
 355

18. Database viewer

Note: The Database Viewer tab is available to individuals in Engineer mode only.

It enables the following actions.

 Connection to an existing database
 Refreshing of displayed database details.
 Viewing and maintenance of existing:
 Automatic inspection routines.
 Automatic measurements.
 Results.
Note: Maintenance of results includes deletion of old or unwanted records.
356 User Guide V21.3 Software

18.1. Database Connection

The default connection is set to use 'ODBC D' and all parameters will be
automatically set.

Pressing 'Test Connection' will check the set-up details are valid. A successful
connection will be shown as below.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 357

Following a successful connection, press the 'Save Connection' button to save this
set-up.
Alternatively, the Database connection can be configured to use the SQL Native
Client. This will allow the X-Ray application to connect to an existing database or a
database on a separate Server.
The saved Automatic Inspection Routines and Results are linked to the Serial
Number of the X-Ray system they were created on. This means routines created on
Machine A may not be accessible to Machine B in the case of a Common Server for
the Database.
To set the X-Ray software to use the SQL Native Client, select this option on the
Database Connection choices in the Database Viewer.
358 User Guide V21.3 Software

Enter the parameters for connection in the Server field. This must be as follows <<PC
Name to connect to>>\DAGESQLEXPRESS. In the following image, the PC Name is set
as '64BITTest'.

Pressing 'Test Connection' will check the set-up details are valid. A successful
connection will be shown as below.

If the database connection fails, contact your local Nordson DAGE representative for
assistance.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 359

18.2. Refreshing Database Data

Pressing the Refresh Data button will update the displayed summary showing how
many different patterns, routines and sets of results are stored in the database.

The 'Backup Data' button allows the database to be exported to a location of the
users choice.

18.3. Automatic Routines

To view the details of an Automatic Routine, it should be selected from the Routine
names drop down list.

The details of the routine can then be viewed.

Individual or All the routines can be deleted from the database using the Delete
buttons. A warning message will be displayed before deletion.
360 User Guide V21.3 Software

18.4. Results
The results for the currently selected Automation Routine can be viewed in the
Results group. The set of results for viewing can be selected from the drop down
list.

The results are shown in the results tree and each branch can either be expanded
or collapsed using the + or - buttons.
Individual or All results can also be deleted from the database.

18.5. Automatic Measurements

The details of Automatic Measurements, e.g. BGA or Area-Void routines, can also
be viewed using the Automatic Measurements group.

Individual or All the Automatic Measurements can be deleted using the delete
buttons.
Care must be observed when deleting Automatic Measurements as these could stop
Automatic Inspection Routines from working correctly if the deleted routine was
used by them.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 361

18.6. Read Only Database access

In some cases, access to the Dage SQL database is required, in order for third party
software to access the stored information.
To facilitate this, a Read Only account has been created.
Read Only username: DageXrayReader
Read Only password: DageXR@3
362 User Guide V21.3 Software
 363

19. User maintenance

19.1. Tube optimization
Adjustments associated with the X-ray tube and the imaging system change slowly
over time, leading to a gradual change in performance of the system. To maintain
the machine in peak performance, it is necessary to reset these adjustments
periodically using an optimization process. Refer to the XD Series X-ray Microscope
Installation and Maintenance Guide for more detail on system maintenance.
The process establishes the correct settings for optimal performance of the tube at
different operating voltages. It allows the use of both built-in and custom routines, for
optimizing either across the complete tube voltage range, or at specific voltages.
The following operations are performed during tube optimization.
Note: Some of these operations are evaluated for success during the automatic
procedure, and further steps may be taken if the first result is not satisfactory.
Centering
This is an adjustment that ensures the electron beam is traveling down the center of
the X-ray tube. It is crucial to good operating efficiency, as poor alignment will lead
to a loss of X-ray output power and darkening of the image.
Focusing
This is essential for obtaining sharp, well-defined images. For the fine detail
necessary to determine focus accurately, the optimization process uses a focus aid
fitted to the rear underside of the manipulator table.
Equalization
This ensures that the image brightness is even across the whole field of view.

19.1.1. Optimizing the tube

19.1.1.1. Built-in methods
There are four built-in optimizations: COMPLETE, WIZARD, CURRENT and CENTER
ONLY.
364 User Guide V21.3 Software

If custom optimizations (see page 365) have been defined, their names will be
added to the list of the four built-in ones shown above.
A locked padlock symbol alongside any optimization indicates that the scheme is
locked, i.e. its configuration cannot be changed by the user.
The settings that are established by optimization tend to change slightly as the
machine warms up. It is recommended that at least one hour is allowed before
Complete or Wizard optimizations are used.
The built-in optimizations are used as follows:
Complete
This will optimize all of the tube settings at all voltages. Depending on the X-ray tube
within the system, this process could take several hours to complete. It is
recommended that this process is run from time to time, when the machine is likely
to be unused. Nordson DAGE recommends at least every six months.
Wizard
This is a similar process to Complete, but only at the four Image Wizard
voltages;60,80,100,120kV, which reduces the total time to around 10 minutes.
As it is quite likely that these are the most frequently used, this is often enough to
restore the optimum settings in many applications.
Current
As it suggests, this optimizes the current voltage being used only and is often used
where the best possible image is needed for (say) a very low-contrast part, highest
resolution or for a report etc.
Center Only
This is used following a filament / crystal (dependant on the tube type) change to
compensate for the slight, inevitable change in electron emission position.
Sealed transmissive tubes have no field serviceable parts.

19.1.1.2. Starting optimization

1. Select the optimization required from the built-in methods (see page 363) or a
custom method (see page 365) from the drop down list shown on the Image
Optimization minitab in the Inspect screen.

2. Start the optimization by clicking Optimize Now.

 User Guide V21.3 Software 365

3. If an earlier run has not yet completed, the following prompt will appear. Answer
as necessary.

In all cases a progress indicator shows the status of each voltage setting.
In this case, Complete optimization was selected.
As the optimization progresses the colored marks against each voltage change
to indicate:
Yellow LED - Optimization in progress
Red Cross - Optimization failed
Green Tick - Optimization completed successfully
4. The sequence can be stopped by clicking Stop Optimizing.

Note: If there are failures, then starting the test again will give the option of trying
the failed voltages only.

19.1.1.3. Custom methods

Note: This tab is only available to Engineers unless access has been given to
Operators and/or Supervisors via the Options screen (see page 373).
Where particular tube voltages are used frequently, appropriate custom optimization
sequences can be created.
1. Select Options.
366 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Under Image Optimization, enter a name for the optimization sequence and press
Enter on the keyboard.

3. By default all voltages are selected. Select the tube voltages that are not
required by clicking the relevant voltage buttons. As each voltage is deselected
the buttons will change to gray.
4. Save this sequence by clicking the Disk button.

Note: Changes are only saved when the Disk button is pressed.
It is possible to de-select various parts of the sequence at each voltage.
In the example below, only tube centering and image equalization at 150kV will
be performed.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 367

19.1.1.4. Image Defect Correction

The detectors used will contain some defective pixels due to the nature of their
construction. These are minimized by the use of a Defect Correction algorithm which
can be run from the Image Optimization minitab.

The Defect Correction is an automatic routine which is started by pressing the Image
Defect Corr. button.

This can only be accessed when in Engineers mode.

368 User Guide V21.3 Software

20. System configuration

20.1. Settings on the options screen
The following sections on the Options screen are available.
 Clearance height (see page 368)
 Live Image Smoothing (see page 368)
 Compatible printing (see page 368)
 Image optimization (see page 369)
 Show controls (see page 369)
 Video Capture (see page 369)
 Low Dose Mode (see page 371)
 CT System Options (if option fitted) (see page 371)
 Distortion Correction (see page 371)
 Defect Correction (see page 372)
 Login (see page 372)
 Equalization (see page 372)
 Camera Gain Settings (Only for Image Intensifier systems) (see page 372)
 Accessibility options (see page 372)

20.1.1. Clearance Height

Enables setting of the maximum height of the sample allowed on the sample holder
to prevent collision with the detector. This can be set between 20mm (Minimum) and
200mm (Maximum). Refer to Over-height samples for more details (see page 47).

20.1.2. Live Image Smoothing

Using this function improves the quality of the image when the machine is used in
live mode. The feature is either On or Off and the amount of smoothing used is set
using the slider bar. If the slider is set to left this will provide 50% smoothing and if
set to the right this will give 100% smoothing but can result in a blurring of the image
if the on screen sample is moved quickly.

20.1.3. Compatible printing

If this option is selected, printing would be slower but it will work with a wider range
of printers.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 369

20.1.4. Image optimization

The User Maintenance section of this guide contains fuller details on this function
(see page 363).

20.1.5. Show controls

The four left-hand options, when selected, enable the appearance of the image
recipe buttons (see page 66).

Selecting the Video capture controls from the drop down list turns on accessibility to
these settings (see page 347). If the Scale Indicator is selected the Video Controls
are replaced by an adjustable scale setting.

Checking the Dose controls will enable a new minitab on the

Inspect screen, which will allow for the control of the amount of radiation dosage
received by a part in the x-ray machine.
370 User Guide V21.3 Software

The system will display an indication of the cumulative dose for the current part and
also the current dose rate based on the state of the x-ray tube. The system also
displays the exposure distance, this distance is calculated as the distance between
the top of the tube and the bottom of the sample tray.
The dose calculator is accessed as follows.
1. Click the Calc button to display the dose calculator.

The calculator allows you to determine the best settings for the x-ray system to
perform the required inspections.
2. When any of the user definable items are changed, click the Recalc button to
update the dose rate and sample dosage values.
3. Once you are happy with the settings click on the Apply button to apply the
appropriate settings to the system.
Due to some physical limitations within the system it may not always be possible
to set the exact settings requested. If this is the case, the system will choose
values as close as possible to those requested.
The System Limits section of the calculator allows you to set a maximum dosage
that is acceptable for an individual part. If the Enable Limit control option is
selected the system will warn the user when the dosage for the current part
reaches 75%, 80% and 90% of the limit. When the dosage reaches 99% x-rays
are turned off and will remain off until the part is removed. The cumulative
dosage amount is reset every time that the sample door is opened.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 371

Note: Dose information is provided as a guide only based on the tube output. The
effects of packaging and shielding by other components on the sample will affect,
and probably reduce, the true dose to the radio-sensitive parts. Therefore the user
must make external dose measurements to confirm the true dose for specific
applications.

20.1.6. Low Dose Mode

This option, located beneath the Default Image Settings section of the Option screen
allows the system to be configured to keep unnecessary exposure to x-rays to a
minimum.
If the Permit Low Dose Mode option is selected, the tube power will be set to zero after
the system has been static (no change in x-ray settings and no movement) for the
period of time defined in the Low dose predelay box.
When the system is in the low dose state the image will remain on the screen and all
image processing and measurement functions will be available. When the machine
is next moved or the x-ray settings are changed the system will reset the power to
the previously selected level and the system will perform as normal.
There may be a few seconds delay before a new image is presented on the screen
following any change to the system power, voltage or position as it will take a finite
time for the x-ray tube to regain the appropriate voltage and power levels.

20.1.7. CT Systems Options (if option fitted)

This is an optional extra. Refer to the separate user guide for the 3D CT Option.
When fitted extra features can be enabled using these controls.

20.1.8. Distortion Correction

Due to the construction of Image Intensifiers, there will be some natural distortion of
the image around the edges of the screen. This option allows for a correction of the
distortion to show the images as flat. The Distortion Correction uses maps which are
generated during the machine setup and calibration using a special calibration jig.
This is particularly important when using the CT option. Systems using Flat Panel
Detectors do not have this distortion effect but this feature is still available.

If Distortion Correction maps do not exist then the feature will give an error
message. In the event of this occurring, contact your local Nordson DAGE
representative.
372 User Guide V21.3 Software

20.1.9. Defect Correction

In some cases, it is useful to be able to view the uncorrected image from the
detector. To allow for this, it is possible to switch off the Defect Correction algorithm
by simply unchecking the 'Defect Correction' tick box.

Checking the tick box, will reapply the correction to hide any defective pixels in the
detector.

20.1.10. Login
These options allow the machine to be configured to force users to login and logout.
It is also possible to force a logout after a period of inactivity and to turn off the
X-rays at logout. Refer to Forced Login (see page 377) for further details.

20.1.11. Equalization
These options are only available in Engineer access level. Refer to Bright/Dark
Image Equalization (see page 73) for further details.

20.1.12. Camera Gain Settings

This option is only available in Supervisor access and above. This feature allows the
user to adjust the camera gain in order to reduce the background noise in the seen
image. Refer to Camera Gain Adjustment (see page 76) for further details.
This is only available on systems using an Image Intensifier.

20.1.13. Accessibility options

Located at the top right of the screen, this allows the setting of Operator and
Supervisor access (see page 373) to selected screens and functions.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 373

20.2. Operator and supervisor access

A powerful feature of the Nordson DAGE XD Machine is the ability to configure the
menu access rights. Options that are not allowed for a particular class of access are
simply removed from being seen on-screen in the GUI.
Note: It is assumed in this manual that the access level is set to Engineer.
Four levels of access are possible:
 Operator No password.
 Supervisor Supervisor password required, if set.
 Engineer Engineer password required, if set.
 Factory Factory key required - Nordson
DAGE use Only.
The access level can be changed as follows.
1. Select Menu>Access and choose the appropriate level option.

Passwords can be set if required. After software installation or re-installation they are all
cleared by default.
A password is set as follows.
1. Open the Menu>Access menu.
2. Select the level required.
3. Select the Menu>Access>Password menu option.
4. Enter and then verify the password for this level.
374 User Guide V21.3 Software

If at any stage a password is forgotten, then the passwords can be cleared provided
the Clear Password disk provided at system installation.
Note: A Clear Password disk can be created from the install CD. Refer to creating a
password access disk in the Installation and Maintenance guide.
The Options tab is, by default, set to be available for Supervisor and Engineer levels.
Only the Engineer access can allow or disallow access to various operating functions
for the Operator and Supervisor levels.
Most of the titles refer to either buttons or screen functions.

To change the access rights, double click in the correct column for the function to be
changed. This will change the Yes to No and vice versa.
In order to protect the system from accidental alterations the System Setup screen
function is set to No but can only be seen as Read Only unless the system is set to
Factory Access.
Any alterations made to the System Setup by unauthorized personnel will invalidate
the machine warranty.

20.3. User names

The user name is intended to allow the management of operator names.
There is no link between the user names and the access levels of the system.
The user name is saved in the database along with test result whenever an
automated inspection sequence is used.
This allows the identification of the operator who created the test results.

20.3.1. Creating a new user

1. Right click on the image and select Screen>Users.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 375

2. Type a unique name or nick-name in the User Name box.

3. If required, a complete name should be typed into the Full Name box.
4. Click Save User.

20.3.2. Editing an existing user’s full name

1. Right click on the image and select Screen>Users.
2. Select the name to be changed from the list.

3. Change any of the details and click Save User.

376 User Guide V21.3 Software

20.3.3. Changing the current user

The current user’s full name is displayed in the title bar of the main application.
Change the user as follows.
1. Select the Users tab.

2. Select the required name from the list.

The name selected will be displayed on the title bar.

20.3.4. Deleting an existing user

1. Right click on the image and select Screen>Users.
2. Select the user to be deleted from the list.

3. Click Delete User.

 User Guide V21.3 Software 377

20.4. Forced Login

These options allow the machine to be configured to force users to login and logout.
The facility is also provided to allow users to be logged out after a period of
inactivity. The machine can also be configured to turn off the x-rays when a user
logs off of the system.

To Force users to login the 'Force Login' checkbox should be checked.

If x-rays should be turned off when a user logs off then the 'Switch off x-rays on
logout' checkbox should be checked.
If users should be logged out after a period of inactivity then the required time in
minutes should be entered in the 'Timeout (mins)' edit box.
Users login using the same user screen as previously described however the
appearance of the screen changes in force login mode depending upon the access
level of the user who is currently logged on.
The system is supplied with one default user: User I.D. dage which is assigned
Engineer level access.
378 User Guide V21.3 Software

Users with Engineer level access can manage the users on the system by clicking
the 'Edit user details' button that appears when the logged on user has the
appropriate level of access.

Using the edit details screen the engineer can create, amend or delete users and
assign the user a particular access level that will be selected when that user logs on
to the system.

It is possible to use Forced Login in association with Access Level Passwords (see page 373),
allowing for an extra level of security.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 379

20.5. Setting the operating language

The Nordson DAGE X-ray machine supports multiple languages.
Change the operating language as follows.
1. Select the World symbol on the top line menu.

2. Select the required language from those available on the language list.
It may take a few seconds for the screens to change to the new language.
New language translations can be created easily by your local Nordson DAGE
representative. Please contact them for support if the language you require is not
available.
To be displayed properly, some languages may require an appropriate font or
language pack to be installed

20.6. Importing a new language file

Once a new language file has been created, it can be imported into the Nordson
DAGE X-ray application by selecting 'Import Language' from the menu list as shown
below.
380 User Guide V21.3 Software

This will open a new window, allowing the user to navigate to the language file
location.

Once selected, the user can switch directly to the imported language by selecting
'Yes' or just import the new language file and retain the currently displayed language
by selecting 'No'.

20.7. Language hierarchy

There are three levels of hierarchy in the translation of languages. The contents of
the levels are text files, extracts of which are shown in the example below.
Translation example for the word Operator.
Step Action Text
1 Check Customer preferences file. MOperator=&Technician
 User Guide V21.3 Software 381

Step Action Text

If not found, step 2. Yes=O.K.
2 Check selected language file. HoldDelay=Temps de Maintien
Yes=Oui
No=Non
If not found, step 3. MOperator=&Operator
3 Check standard English file. HoldDelay=HoldDelay
Yes=Yes
No=No
MOperator=&Operator

Any software upgrades will only include updates to the English language file.
Refer to "Updating a language file" (see page 386) for details on how to update the
local language file.

20.8. Format of language files

The following topics describe how to create and modify language files. It is important
that the master language file (English(US).dmsg) is not altered in any way.
All the language files follow the format outlined below.
The example given is for the master English translation file.
[Messages]
Yes=Yes
No=No
Grade=Grade
GradeLastTest=Grade Last Test
SampleIncomplete=Sample is incomplete
The text [Messages] indicates to the software that this is a language file.
The remaining lines specify the text associated with a label as described below:
Label=text
The label is used by the software as an identifier; each one is unique and must not
be changed.
The software searches through the file looking at each of the labels.
Each label is recognized, and the text following the equals sign (=) is read as the
text associated with the label.
There are some formatting options that may be used as described below:
Long lines
Some text is split onto two lines by the use of a 'new line' as shown below:
QSaveSample=Current Sample is unsaved.\rDo you want to save the
sample?
382 User Guide V21.3 Software

The text "\r" is a formatting identifier indicating a new line is to be started.

Data within the text
Sometimes it is necessary for the software to adapt the text with some specific
information. An example is shown below:
MustEnterUserField=You must enter a value in the '%s' field
In this case the text %s indicates that this is the point to substitute the text. Other
substitutes such as %d or %t for numbers may also be used.
The position of the substitute text can be altered to suit the translation, but it must
not be removed, or the meaning of the message will be lost.
Disabling lines
It is possible to disable translation lines from being used. A good example is the
default custom definition file, where all of the labels and standard English
translations are listed for convenience, but they are all disabled as follows:
SampleIncomplete=!Sample is incomplete
The exclamation mark (!) disables the text from being used.
Comments
A line in the language file that starts with a ; or a # is a comment and will be ignored
when the file is read.
For example,
;Japanese Translation
Shortcuts
Menu and dialog box items can sometimes be chosen by using an 'Alt' key shortcut.
For example, 'Alt+F' for the File menu.
The letter to use for the shortcut is specified by placing an & in front of it. For
example, MAccess=&Access would specify that pressing the 'Alt+A' keys as the
Access menu shortcut.
However, these shortcuts are not normally used in the X-ray software.

20.9. Creating custom definitions of terms

There is a hierarchy of message translation (see page 380). The first point of
reference is the custom file, located in
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Dage\XRay\Options.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 383

This file is for customer use, and any of the messages or names that appear on the
Dage screens can be changed by editing this file.
Using a text editor such as Notepad, open the file, which contains every reference
label and associated text, all disabled.
The text editor used must be able to save files in UTF-8 format

There are some conventions in the labels as follows:

TNewSample=!New Sample
MPassword=!&Password
AChangeTestSettings=!Test Group screen
The first letter helps indicate where the text is used. In these cases:
T = a tab on top of the screen.
M = a menu item from the top menu bar.
B = A button.
Q = A Question.
TT = On screen tool tips.
X = Any text in a dialog box.
For example: Change the word Operator to Technician in all menus.
1. Open the file C:\Users\Public\Documents\Dage\XRay\Options\Custom.dmsg
using Notepad (or equivalent text editor.).
384 User Guide V21.3 Software

2. Use Search to locate each occurrence of the word Operator.

3. On the right side of the equals sign only substitute the word Technician.
4. Remove the exclamation mark (!) to enable the substitution.
The following lines should have been modified:
Before
ASetupOperator=!Setup | Operator screen
MOperator=!&Operator
TOperator=!Operator
Operator=!Operator
ErrorSavingOperatorPrefs=!Error saving operator preferences
ErrorLoadingOperatorPrefs=!Error loading operator preferences
After
ASetupOperator=Setup | Technician screen
MOperator=&Technician
TOperator=Technician
Operator=Technician
ErrorSavingOperatorPrefs=Error saving technician preferences
ErrorLoadingOperatorPrefs=Error loading technician preferences
Save the file in UTF-8 format.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 385

In order to turn on the changes, select any another language then return to your
chosen language.
Note: It can take a few seconds for the screens to react to a language change.
The revised text should now appear.
The modified "custom.dmsg" file can be copied to any other Dage X-ray machine, as
long as the system OS is the same.

20.10. Creating a new language

This topic is included for those customers who wish to create a translation file where
one does not exist. We would normally expect our agents to provide the translation.
However we recognize that this may not be possible or convenient. The language
files have the extension .dmsg.
1. Open the file custom language file, using Notepad (or any equivalent text editor,
as long as the file can be saved as UTF-8.).
Do not change this file
2. Use the File>Save As menu option to create a copy. The filename will be that
which appears in the language menu and must have the extension .dmsg.
For example, to create a Polish translation file, the filename 'Polski.dmsg' would
be appropriate.
Add a comment (a line starting with ; or #) at the top of the file saying what
language this is in English e.g. '; Polish translation'.
3. Next translate the contents (see page 381) of each line on the right side of the
equals sign (=) in turn.
There is naturally a limited amount of space available on some parts of the
screen, so take care to be as brief as possible.
Don't forget to remove the ! after the = to enable the translation.
4. Save the file in UTF-8 format to an easily accessible location (e.g.
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Dage\XRay\).
5. Use "Import Language" (see page 379) from the menu bar and set the local
language.
Carefully check each screen in turn for errors, or for missing or truncated text.
6. Use "Export current language" (see page 386) and save the file to an easily
accessible location (e.g. C:\Users\Public\Documents\Dage\XRay\).
7. Make any necessary changes to the file and use the import function to update
the local language and set the language as required.
Note: It can take a few seconds for the screens to react to a language change.
An example of how to use the custom.dmsg file to translate entries to German is
shown below;
; Custom
MAccess=!&Access
MOperator=!&Operator
MSupervisor=!&Supervisor
MEngineer=!&Engineer
386 User Guide V21.3 Software

TInspect=!Inspect
TEngineer=!Engineering

; German
MAccess=&Zugriff
MOperator=&Bediener
MSupervisor=&Techniker
MEngineer=&Einrichter
TInspect=Inspektion
TEngineer=Einrichtung
Note the use of the English language description at the start of the translated file
and the removal of ! from the beginning of each translation. In some lines & has
been used to indicate short cut key access if this feature is switched on in the
Windows operating system.

20.11. Updating a language file

Following a software upgrade, and when the first time the Nordson DAGE X-ray
machine is started, the following actions occur:
1. The currently selected language file is scanned and compared with the new
master English language file. Any new lines found in the English are added to
the selected language file, in English, but set to disabled by use of an
exclamation mark (!).
2. The custom definitions file is similarly scanned.
It is only then necessary to translate the extra lines added. Other language files
can be updated in this way by selecting each in turn from the language list.
3. Any item that is in the local language or custom file but is not in the english file
is deleted. It is either a mistake or an old translation of some text that no longer
exists.
4. The local language file can then be exported to an easily accessible location
(e.g. C:\Users\Public\Documents\Dage\Xray\) and any new entries in English
can be translated as required.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 387

To export the local language, first ensure it is selected as the displayed

language, then select 'Export Current language' from the menu bar.

A 'Save As' dialog will open allowing the user to select the file save location.

Press 'Save'.
If the language file already exists either overwrite it or save it with a new file
name.
5. Modify the language file as required (see page 381) and save it in UTF-8 format.
6. Use the 'Import Language' (see page 379) function to import and set the
modified local language file.
388 User Guide V21.3 Software

20.12. Licensed Functionality

Some functionality of the NordsonDAGE x-ray application requires a license in order
for it to function. This includes the X-Plane® functionality. Please contact your local
NordsonDAGE representative for further information.
The licensed features can be checked by opening the License Details window from
[Menu]>[Setup]>[Licensing...]
 User Guide V21.3 Software 389

This will open a new window giving details of any functionality already available
through the license.
390 User Guide V21.3 Software

If a purchased option is not available, please contact your local NordsonDAGE

representative.
If a new license file is required, your NordsonDAGE representative will require
certain information about the system the license file is required for. This can be
obtained by pressing the 'Copy Machine Details' button then 'pasting the information
into a Notepad file.
This file can then be sent to your local NordsonDAGE representative for the required
license file.
Once the license file has been received, press the 'Import License' button and
navigate to where the file has been saved.
The application will then require a restart for the license to become active.
License files are not transferable between different systems.
If new options are required for a system with an existing license file, this can be
exported to a user defined folder and then sent to the appropriate NordsonDAGE
representative for the option to be added.
To export an existing license file, press the 'Export License' button and navigate to a
suitable folder from the displayed 'Select Folder' window. Press the 'Select Folder'
button to complete the export.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 391

21. Principles of operation

This section gives additional background on the operating principles behind the
Nordson DAGE XD Series X-ray Microscopes.
This knowledge is not essential to the normal operation or maintenance of the
machine.
However, it is included as appreciation may help in diagnosing and solving unusual
problems not covered elsewhere in this guide.
The operation of the x-ray tube and imaging system is usually the least familiar
technology to production line engineers and technicians, and hence the majority of
this section is devoted to a background on these topics.

21.1. X-ray generation

21.1.1. The electromagnetic spectrum
The term x-rays describes electromagnetic radiation in a certain energy band.
Other energy bands are known as "radio", "microwave", "visible", "ultra-violet", etc.
The boundaries between one band and another are rather loosely defined as shown
below.

Energy in any electromagnetic field is made up of discrete packets called "photons".

The wavelength of a photon is inversely proportional to the energy used to create it.
This means more energetic photons have a shorter wavelength.
Photons that we can see as (say) red will always have the same energy.
If the red light becomes brighter, we are seeing more photons every second.
Red light has an energy of about 1.5 eV (electron Volts), violet light around 3 eV.
A photon of energy more than 12 eV is termed "ionizing radiation" and can damage
other materials as it has sufficient energy when impacting another atom to remove
an electron.
This is particularly important when considering the potential damage to the cell
structures of our own bodies.
The XD series machines generate photons with a maximum energy of 160,000 eV.
This energy is clearly a health risk, hence the extensive use of lead shielding within
the equipment.
392 User Guide V21.3 Software

21.1.2. Simple x-ray generator

A simple method of generating x-rays is shown above.

Two electrodes (anode and cathode) are suspended in a vacuum chamber and
connected to a high voltage power supply.
When the cathode is heated to a sufficient temperature, the electrons in the material
form a "cloud" over the surface in a process called "Thermionic Emission".
The potential on the anode accelerates the electron towards the more positive
potential.
When the electron hits the anode, a small (<1%) proportion have some of their
energy converted to x-rays.
The maximum possible energy of the x-ray photon in electron-volts is equivalent to
the accelerating potential – i.e. 1000V creates x-rays up to a maximum energy of
1000 eV.

21.1.3. Thermionic emission

 User Guide V21.3 Software 393

As the metal of the cathode is heated, electrons become more energetic, and can
obtain sufficient velocity to leave the surface of the material.
As atoms are usually of neutral overall charge (the electrons balancing with the
protons), the loss of a negatively charged electron leaves a net positive charge on
the cathode.

As opposite charges attract, the electron moves back to the surface of the cathode.
This process happens continuously and creates a "cloud" of electrons on the
cathode.

If a positive potential is available nearby, then the electron may be attracted towards
it provided the voltage gradient from the electron to the anode is greater than that to
the cathode.
This is the principle of the thermionic diode or rectifier first used in radio and
th
telegraphy equipment in the early 20 century.

21.1.4. Controlling current flow

394 User Guide V21.3 Software

The addition of a control electrode modifies the voltage gradient from the anode.
The negative potential can be set to create an additional "hurdle" for the electron to
pass.
Electrons with sufficient energy (velocity) will make it past the control electrode, and
then accelerate normally to the anode.
Lower energy electrons will not be able to overcome the negative voltage gradient of
the control electrode, and therefore return back to the cathode.
By changing the negative potential on the control electrode, the current flow to the
anode can be regulated from maximum (no control voltage) to zero (high negative
voltage).
This is the principle of the thermionic triode or amplifier valve.

21.1.5. X-rays from the tungsten target

The Bohr model of the atomic structure is used in this section to describe what
happens when an electron hits an atom of tungsten in the target.
The main principles of this model are:-
a. Electrons orbit around the nucleus of the atom.
b. The nucleus contains protons and neutrons that make up most of the atomic
mass.
c. Protons have a positive charge and electrons a similar negative charge.
d. There are usually equal numbers of protons and electrons so the net charge is
zero.
e. Electrons can only exist in special orbits around the nucleus.
f. An electron in a bigger orbit has more energy than one in a smaller orbit.
It is a common principle of physics that any object will give up its energy if possible.
If an electron is in a high orbit and there is space in a lower one, then it will move to
the lower orbit and lose that energy as electromagnetic radiation. The difference in
energy levels determines the energy of the photon.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 395

In the picture above, an electron impacts a tungsten atom from the lower right.
By luck, it gives an electron additional energy which means it must enter a higher
orbit.
This is unstable however; the electron must decay back to the lower orbit and
release that energy in the form of a photon.
Depending on the orbital energy levels the photons have a number of discrete
energies and therefore wavelengths as shown on the x-ray spectrum chart.
This radiation is known as "Characteristic Radiation" and is unique to the target
material.
396 User Guide V21.3 Software

In the picture above, an electron enters a tungsten atom from the lower right, but
does not impact an electron. However, its direction is changed and an amount of
energy is lost.
This loss of energy (velocity) is converted to a photon. The more energy lost by the
electron means more energy in the photon and hence the shorter the wavelength.
As these interactions are random, a broad band of wavelengths are generated, but
limited to the maximum energy of the incident electron as shown on the x-ray
spectrum chart.
This radiation is known as "Brehmsstrahlung" which means "braking radiation" and
is retained from the original German to describe the radiation which is emitted when
electrons are decelerated or "braked".

In practice both methods of x-ray generation are present, and the x-ray output
spectrum is a combination of both as shown above.
 User Guide V21.3 Software 397

21.2. Imaging with x-rays

X-rays travel in straight lines and cannot be focused by conventional means.
Denser objects absorb more x-rays and create a shadow on the imager.
The shadow is larger than the object by the geometric magnification.
Moving the object closer to the x-ray source increases the magnification.
The detector accepts incoming x-ray photons, converts them to visible photons,
amplifies them (depending on the detector type) and creates a visible image for the
operator that is representative of the varying intensity of the incoming x-rays. For
example, in an image intensifier, a CCD camera shows the results of the output
screen.

21.2.1. The Importance of Spot Size

The size of the x-ray source determines the sharpness of the image.
A small spot will ultimately allow smaller details to be seen at extreme
magnifications.
The diagram below shows how a sharp edge is imaged by different x-ray sources.
398 User Guide V21.3 Software

21.3. Radiation measurements and units

21.3.1. SI units
There are two quantities of radiation dose in use: -
Absorbed Dose
A measure of the energy that is deposited in a material per unit mass from any
interaction with radiation.
Equivalent Dose(HT)
This is the absorbed dose modified by a weighting factor (Wr). Wr will vary
depending on the type of radiation taht is being used (x-rays neutrons, etc.) an the
radio-sensitivity of the tissue type(s) that is being exposed to the radiation. Some
human tissue types are more radio-sensitive than others to the same level of
radiation exposure.
The relationship between equivalent dose and absorbed dose is given by: HT = D x
Wr.
The units of radiation measurement are defined by the International System of Units
(SI):
Quantity SI Unit
Activity becquerel (Bq) (disintegrations per
second)
-1
Absorbed Dose gray (Gy) (J Kg )
Equivalent Dose sievert (Sv) (Gy x Wr)
Note:- Wr is the weighting factor
Type of Radiation Wr (weighting factor)
X-rays, -rays,  1
particles
Neutrons and Protons 5 - 20
 Particles 20
Note: - For X,  and  radiation the gray and the sievert are numerically equal. This
is because Sv = Gy x Wr = Gy x 1 in this case.

21.3.2. Old units

Some countries (notably the USA) continue to use non-SI units
Quantity Old Unit
Activity curie (Ci) becquerel (Bq)
Absorbed Dose rad (R) gray (Gy)
Equivalent Dose rem sievert (Sv)
Note:- rem stands for Roentgen Equivalent Man
-6 -1
Therefore 1 μSv per hour (10 Sv.h ) is equivalent to 0.1 milli Roentgen per hour
-4 -1
(10 rem.h ). 1Gy = 10R
 399

22. Index Automated Inspection Routine Wizard •

272, 276, 307
2
Automated Routine analysis • 341
2x Perpendicular Measurement • 255
Automatic advance • 266, 315, 319
A
Automatic BGA and void measurements
About region drawing tools • 145, 149, • 159, 266
169
Automatic fiducial alignment • 172, 266,
About this manual • 7 269, 270, 292, 309, 337
Absolute Position readout • 246 Automatic image processing • 74
Accessibility options • 368, 372 Automatic Measurements • 360
Adaptive method • 127, 154 Automatic movement between inspection
Adding a cursor inspection step • 306, steps • 340
310 Automatic Routines • 359
Adding a fiducial alignment step to a Automatically setting the equalization
pattern • 309 images • 68
Adding a manual inspection step • 308, B
309, 310
Beryllium • 17
Adding a marker • 110
BGA execution • 189
Adding additional image enhancements •
63, 67, 75 Blob Detection method • 158

Adding an automatic inspection routine Blob Detector • 124, 128, 152, 158
step • 309 Board, pattern or inspection step
Adding an orbiting inspection step • 266, exclusion • 331
306, 310 Bright/Dark Image Equalization and
Adding and removing void areas Noise Pattern Correlation • 28, 72, 73,
manually • 150 372

Adding image filtering and Brightness and Contrast adjustment • 77

enhancements • 85, 281 Built-in methods • 68, 363, 364
Adding notes and saving images • 99 C
Adjusting for the best image • 63 CAD Import Wizard • 344
Adjusting the brightness of the image • Camera Gain Adjustment • 76, 372
56, 67, 76
Camera Gain Settings • 368, 372
Adjusting the contrast • 52, 53, 76
Capturing video images • 235, 347, 369
Advanced tools • 125, 127, 149, 154
Changing an existing inspection step •
Advanced Tools • 202, 208 300, 317
Alternate measurement access • 259 Changing measurement limits • 198
Annotations • 36, 85, 99, 101 Changing the current user • 376
Applying image equalization • 72 Changing the magnification • 58
Appointed safety personnel • 16 Choose program(s) to delete • 272, 274
Assigning a recipe to a button • 94 Choose the alignment method • 291
Auto option • 155
400 User Guide V21.3 Software

Choosing a pre-configured setting • 65, Creation Tools • 202

145
Cross-hairs • 272, 276
Choosing from the buttons • 63, 66, 281,
CT Systems Options (if option fitted) •
369
368, 371
Choosing from the list • 63, 65
Current Location • 246
Choosing the automation type • 160
Custom methods • 364, 365
Choosing the automation type - void
Customizing for low density samples •
measurement • 168
47
Choosing the measurement settings • 166
D
Clearance Height • 47, 368
Dage Precision Industries Limited
Clearing markers • 110 Software License - EULA • 5
Coloring the image • 81 Data storage • 319, 326
Compatible printing • 368 Database Connection • 356
Configuring fonts • 100, 101 Database viewer • 28, 223, 355
Configuring the inspection run • 335 Defect Correction • 368, 372
Configuring the way patterns are run and Define board layout method • 287
reported • 272, 278, 311, 313, 319,
321, 340 Define board outline • 286
Define number of boards and patterns •
Controlling current flow • 393
285
Controls and Indicators • 22
Define pattern outline • 292
Correcting for sample misalignment •
Defining filters • 87
337
Create / Edit inspection steps within an Defining inspection steps within an
automated routine • 272, 277, 299 automated routine • 297, 299

Creating 3-D images • 82 Defining the area outline • 168

Creating a BGA routine • 159 Deleting a recipe • 95

Creating a CAD template • 211 Deleting an existing user • 376

Creating a filter pipeline • 67, 88 Deleting an inspection step • 318

Creating a new language • 385 Deleting part of a shape • 148

Creating a new routine using the Deleting saved Auto routines • 223
Automatic Inspection Routine (AIR) Display options • 152
wizard • 281, 330
Distance Only (mm) measurements •
Creating a new user • 374 250
Creating a Pad Analysis Routine • 183 Distortion Correction • 368, 371
Creating a QFN routine • 175 E
Creating a Template Based Analysis • Edit Custom Options • 300, 304
217
Edit General Details • 300, 301
Creating an automated void measurement
routine • 168 Edit the Reference Image • 300, 303

Creating custom definitions of terms • Edit the Routine Layout • 300, 306
382 Editing an existing user’s full name • 375
 User Guide V21.3 Software 401

Editing Failure Codes • 278, 314 High voltage hazard • 18

Editing inspection steps within an Histogram Adjustment • 78
automated routine • 279, 298, 309
Histogram and Brightness/Contrast
Editor Modes • 200 controls • 233
Emboss • 92 How it works • 64
Emergency stop button • 24 I
Environmental impact statement- X-ray Identifying ball A1 and B1 • 165
machines only • 19
Image averaging • 58, 67, 75
Environmental information - X-ray
machines • 19 Image Defect Correction • 367

Equalization • 368, 372 Image Enhancement Filters • 235

Executing a routine • 188 Image optimization • 368, 369

Exporting Data • 137 Image quality settings • 67

Exporting defect locations in CSV format Image recipes • 92

• 112 Imaging with x-rays • 397
Exporting the data • 139 Import CAD file • 276
Exporting the report • 322, 328 Importing a new language file • 379, 385,
387
F
Importing an existing CAD template •
Failed execution • 189
216
Fiducial • 229
Importing and Using CAD Data • 273,
Fiducial alignment • 292, 338 276, 343
Finding the ball outline • 118, 124 Inserting an inspection step • 318
Forced Login • 372, 377 Inspecting a Quad-flatpacked No Lead
(QFN) device • 175, 266
Format of language files • 381, 385, 387
Inspecting a sample • 49
Forward • 3
Inspecting Devices using Pad Analysis •
G 183, 266
General viewing recipe • 93 Inspecting die, BGA and general voids
Getting a picture • 51 automatically • 267, 305
Getting ready • 49, 115 Inspecting wire sweep automatically •
171, 266
Getting started • 37
Interlocking methods • 16
Grading options - logging passes and
failures during automated inspection • Introduction • 85
266, 311, 315, 319 Inverting the image • 81
Gray scale equalization • 67, 68 Ionizing radiation • 15
H Iso-centric oblique angle viewing or
Hardware • 22 'Setting the Height' • 59, 60, 116, 160,
163, 168, 171, 175, 183, 231, 245, 246,
Hardware joystick option • 58 249, 250, 253, 255, 261
Hazardous materials • 17
High res. map • 54, 55
402 User Guide V21.3 Software

J Making distance and angle measurements

• 249
Jog control • 243
Manual alignment • 291, 338
K
Manual board layout • 288
Keyboard and mouse • 24
Manual method • 127, 157
Key-switch and Power On button • 23
Manual pattern layout • 295
L
Manual Product Alignment • 269, 295
Labels • 12
Marking failures on the navigation map •
Language hierarchy • 380, 382 109
Layer Tools • 201 Marking the image • 36, 85, 99
Layer Types • 199 Matrix board layout • 289
Lead • 17 Matrix pattern layout • 296
Licensed Functionality • 388 Maximizing magnification • 45
Live Contrast Stretching • 79, 233 Measurement Features • 36, 243
Live Image Filters • 31, 95 Measurement methods • 15
Live Image Processing • 95 Measuring ball grid arrays (BGA)
Live Image Smoothing • 97, 368 manually • 115, 166, 236
Live Mapping • 54 Measuring die and general voids
manually • 145, 236
Loading a previously saved map • 114
Measuring point-to-point (distance) • 248
Loading an existing automation routine •
187 Measuring the ball area • 122
Loading/unloading a sample • 44 Measuring the ball diameter • 121
Local safety rules • 16 Measuring the ball outlines • 117
Locating the part • 115 Measuring the ball roundness • 121
Locking off the power • 17 Measuring the ball voiding • 124, 167
Login • 28, 368, 372 Measuring voids • 149, 169
Low Dose Mode • 28, 368, 371 Measuring voids by means of blob
detection • 128
Low Resolution Monitor Option • 32
Measuring wire sweep • 251
M
Merging two shapes • 147
Machine overview • 21
Model Import, Saving images and
Main editor controls • 270, 299, 309, Exporting projections • 232, 235
311, 317, 330, 335, 336
Monitor • 24, 33
Main isolator • 23
More Options List • 36
Main tabs • 27
More options menu • 33, 34, 56, 58, 77,
Making a navigation map • 24, 33, 52, 79, 100, 101, 103, 104, 106, 109, 119,
63, 282, 342, 344 123, 154, 161, 171, 176, 181, 184, 243,
Making automated inspections • 330 246, 249, 250, 251, 342
Making automatic inspections • 52, 222, Mouse Drag • 56, 57
223, 265, 342 Mouse Joystick • 56, 57
 User Guide V21.3 Software 403

Moving the machine • 14 Printing the navigation map with markers

• 111
Moving the picture around • 56
Product alignment points • 267
Moving through the inspection sequence
• 337, 340 Project Tools • 200
Multiple measurements • 123 Q
N Quad Screen • 83
Navigation map • 272, 276, 284 Quick guide • 63
Noise reduction • 75 R
Number the features Checkbox • 140 Radiation measurements and units • 398
O Read Only Database access • 361
Oblique angle and Feature Height • 59, Recipe settings • 115
61, 245
Reconstruction • 227, 231
Odd shaped regions • 146
Recording and grading results • 340
Old units • 398
Recording or editing an Automated
Open a program • 272, 273, 298 Inspection Routine • 281, 311
Operator and supervisor access • 28, 41, Refreshing Database Data • 359
49, 347, 349, 365, 372, 373, 378
Relative Position readout • 246
Operator grading and viewing options •
Remote Fiducial set-up • 227, 229, 230,
280, 298
237, 239
Operator reference image and prompts •
Removing or refitting a sample holder •
279, 303
46
Optimizing the tube • 363
Removing unwanted objects • 161
Outline and Void Analysis • 236
Replication Tools • 203
Over-height samples • 45, 47, 368
Results • 191, 324, 360
Overview • 86
Right Hand Panel • 31
Overview of features • 271
Routine loaded • 188
P Run Automatic Inspection Routine • 272,
Panel Activation • 29, 31, 117 276, 281
Part location and alignment • 267, 291 Running an inspection routine • 318, 341
Pass / fail limits • 152, 154, 157 S
Perpendicular Measurement • 253 Safe disposal instructions- X-ray
machines only • 19
Pixel graph • 258
Safety information • 11
Positioning controls • 243
Safety Lockouts • 14
Positioning the keyboard and mouse • 26
Sample access door • 25
Practical suggestions • 271
Sample CSV Data File • 141
Principles of operation • 391
Sample holders • 46, 281
Printer • 25
Save Button • 139
Printing the image • 36, 108
Save or copy current routine • 272
404 User Guide V21.3 Software

Save the current map • 113 Setting the void parameters and limits •
169
Saving a recipe • 93
Setting up the work station • 25
Saving the image • 36, 108, 250, 253,
261 Setting void parameters • 167
Saving the navigation map with markers Settings on the options screen • 28, 368
• 110
Shape Attributes Editor • 206
Saving the routine • 167, 170
Shape Selection • 206
Scan Board • 52, 53
Shielding methods • 15
Scan Full • 53
Short Cut Keys • 232
Second Monitor Option • 33
Show controls • 368, 369
Second Monitor Results Screen • 24, 33,
SI units • 398
342
Simple x-ray generator • 392
Select auto-advance option • 284
Software interface • 26
Select pattern layout method • 293
Standard automatic method • 124
Selecting a filter • 91
Starting optimization • 364
Selecting an image recipe • 93, 115
Starting the BGA Wizard • 160
Selecting an inspection routine • 330
Starting the inspection • 332
Selecting and Running the Template
Based Analysis • 220 Starting the Void Wizard • 168
Selecting filters for use • 91 Statutory regulations • 16
Selecting the routine • 187, 223 Stretch Contrast Filters • 31, 79, 96
Selecting threshold and ball size • 161 Stretch Contrast minitab • 79
Selecting what to include • 164 Successful execution • 191
Selecting what to see • 55, 63 Switching off in an emergency • 44
Setting an orbit • 61 Switching on the X-rays • 49, 50, 63
Setting filter availability • 90 Symbols • 11
Setting the bright equalization image System configuration • 368
manually • 70, 76
T
Setting the chair • 26
Teaching a fiducial • 270, 292, 302
Setting the console and monitor height •
Template Based Analysis • 198
25
Template Edit Tools • 202
Setting the correct pitch • 162
Template Library Access • 209
Setting the dark equalization image
manually • 68, 76 Test Sample ID Editbox • 140
Setting the height • 116 The effects of noise • 75
Setting the operating language • 379 The electromagnetic spectrum • 391
Setting the picture • 116 The filter kernel • 86
Setting the tube manually • 66, 115 The Importance of Spot Size • 397
Setting the video capture options • 28, Thermionic emission • 392
347, 349
 User Guide V21.3 Software 405

Thick Solder option • 128, 133 X

Thin Solder option • 128, 130, 136 XLSX Results • 142
Threshold detection • 124, 128 X-Plane® Acquisition Screen • 225
Through-hole percentage fill analysis • X-Plane® Introduction • 225
261, 266, 272, 281, 306
X-Plane® Operation • 229, 237
Top level Automatic Inspection Routine
X-Plane® Parameters • 226
Controls • 272
X-Plane® Screen • 226
Trimming a shape • 148
Tube optimization • 28, 363, 369 X-Plane® Viewer • 231

Turning off • 42 X-ray generation • 391

Turning on • 37 X-ray interlocks and safety warnings • 16

X-ray safety • 15
U
X-ray tube vacuum • 41
Understanding Filters • 86
X-ray warnings • 25
Updating a language file • 381, 385, 386
X-rays from the tungsten target • 394
Updating a recipe • 94
User maintenance • 363
User names • 374
Using automatic inspections • 298, 330
Using the CAD editor • 36, 199
Using the imaging wizard • 63
Using the map • 55
Using video capture • 347
V
Video • 235
Video Codecs • 350, 352
View Indicators • 152, 157
View past inspection results • 272, 277,
341
Viewing an automated inspection routine
report off-line • 322, 325
Viewing at an angle • 44, 58, 245
Viewing the on-line inspection report •
341
Viewing the on-line summary report •
267, 323, 325
W
Warm-up • 42, 49
What is Exported • 138